DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
Document Revision History:
Document
Table
Date
Revision
ID
R4 – Add/Update Section
Feature
Name
Description of Change
Change
Requested By
Edited By
Keystone Add/Update Listing Redesign: Requirements Document (version 1.0)
Project: Keystone Add/Update Listing Section Redesign
Original Creation Date: October 18, 2011
Prepared by: Laura Palmer
Document status: _x_ Draft __ Proposed __ Validated __ Approved
Reference Documents
Style Guide3.pdf
master taxonomy.xls
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 1 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Table of Contents
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 2 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Keystone Add/Update Listing Redesign: Requirements Document (version 1.0) ............................................................................................. 1
Reference Documents ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1
Table of Contents.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 2
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 4
1.1 Purpose of This Document ...................................................................................................................................................................... 4
1.2 How to Use This Document .................................................................................................................................................................... 4
1.3 Scope of the Product .............................................................................................................................................................................. 4
1.4 Business Case for the Product ................................................................................................................................................................ 4
2. General Description ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 5
2.1 Product Perspective ................................................................................................................................................................................ 5
2.2 Product Functions ................................................................................................................................................................................... 6
2.3 User Characteristics ................................................................................................................................................................................ 6
2.4 General Constraints ................................................................................................................................................................................ 6
2.5 Assumptions and Dependencies ............................................................................................................................................................. 6
2.5.1 Existing Fields ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 6
3.0 Specific Requirements ................................................................................................................................................................................ 6
3.1 System Requirements ............................................................................................................................................................................. 6
3.2 Integration Requirements ....................................................................................................................................................................... 7
3.3 Security Requirements ............................................................................................................................................................................ 7
3.4 User Interface Requirements .................................................................................................................................................................. 8
3.4.1 Add/Updated Section Home Page ................................................................................................................................................. 12
3.4.2 Field Search Box Results ................................................................................................................................................................ 30
3.4.3 Submit to MLS Functionality .......................................................................................................................................................... 34
3.4.4a Listing > Essentials........................................................................................................................................................................ 36
3.4.4b Listing > Sale Transaction Details ................................................................................................................................................. 48
3.4.4c Listing > Rental Transaction Details.............................................................................................................................................. 60
3.4.4d Listing > Remarks ......................................................................................................................................................................... 70
3.4.4e Listing > Contacts ......................................................................................................................................................................... 76
3.4.5a Promotions > Media..................................................................................................................................................................... 93
3.4.5b Promotions > Documents ............................................................................................................................................................ 96
3.4.5c Promotions > Showing Instructions ............................................................................................................................................. 99
3.4.5d Promotions > Open Houses ....................................................................................................................................................... 109
3.4.5e Promotions > Marketing ............................................................................................................................................................ 117
3.4.6a Financial > Lending ..................................................................................................................................................................... 119
3.4.6b Financial > Fees .......................................................................................................................................................................... 123
3.4.6c Financial > Tax Info ..................................................................................................................................................................... 130
3.4.6d Financial > Investment ............................................................................................................................................................... 137
3.4.7a Building > Exterior Essentials ..................................................................................................................................................... 145
3.4.7b Building > Systems and Utilities ................................................................................................................................................. 157
3.4.7c Building > Building Materials ...................................................................................................................................................... 165
3.4.7d Building > Exterior Features ....................................................................................................................................................... 171
3.4.7e Building > Interior Essentials ...................................................................................................................................................... 174
3.4.7f Building > Room Details .............................................................................................................................................................. 185
3.4.8a Lot/Land > Essentials.................................................................................................................................................................. 198
3.4.8b Lot/Land > Details ...................................................................................................................................................................... 208
3.4.8c Lot/Land > Farm Essentials......................................................................................................................................................... 219
3.4.9a Community > Essentials ............................................................................................................................................................. 227
3.4.9b Community > Car Optional ........................................................................................................................................................ 240
3.4.9c Community > Sr. Living ............................................................................................................................................................... 248
3.4.9d Community > Golf/Tennis .......................................................................................................................................................... 252
3.4.9e Community > Water Oriented ................................................................................................................................................... 256
3.4.9f Community > Outdoor Recreation.............................................................................................................................................. 264
3.4.10a Quick Entry > Mandatory Template ......................................................................................................................................... 267
3.4.10b Quick Entry > Amenities Template........................................................................................................................................... 268
3.4.10c Quick Entry > Eco-Friendly Template ....................................................................................................................................... 274
3.4.10d Quick Entry > Top Searched Template ..................................................................................................................................... 279
3.4.10e Quick Entry > Short Term Rental Template .............................................................................................................................. 281
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 3 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
3.4.11a New Features – MRISAssist: Step 1. Search for a Listing .......................................................................................................... 286
3.4.11b New Features – MRISAssist: Step 2, Search Results................................................................................................................. 290
3.4.11c New Features – MRISAssist: Step 3, Accept Imported Fields ................................................................................................... 299
3.4.11d. New Features – Quick Start Profile Sheet ............................................................................................................................... 305
4. Appendices ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 310
Appendix A. Standard Functionality ......................................................................................................................................................... 310
5. Glossary .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 314
6. Index ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 316
1. Introduction
This document contains the design and associated system requirements for the Keystone Redesign project. These requirements have
been derived from several sources, including customer focus groups, one-on-one interviews, solicited and un-solicited customer
suggestions, best practices benchmarking and the product ideation process. The inputs have been combined along with ideas and
suggestions from the MRIS team to develop a new input application that should deliver three key benefits:
1. Agents should be able to enter a property listing in a shorter period of time with fewer keystrokes and mouse-clicks
2. The accuracy of the data should be improved
3. The level of details and description of descriptors should be more deep and broad.
1.1 Purpose of This Document
This document is intended to guide development of Keystone Redesign – specifically the Property Input Application (PIA). The document
will go through several stages during the course of the project:
Draft: The first version, or draft version, is compiled after requirements have been discovered, recorded, classified, and prioritized.
Proposed: The draft document is then proposed as a potential requirements specification for the project. The proposed document should
be reviewed by several parties, who may comment on ways to improve the requirements and ensure completeness of requirements
with the whole team. Readers include end-users, developers, project managers, and any other stakeholders. The document may be
amended and reproposed several times before moving to the next stage.
Validated: Once the various stakeholders have agreed to the requirements in the document, it is considered validated.
Approved: The validated document is accepted by representatives of each party of stakeholders as an appropriate statement of
requirements for the project. The developers then use the requirements document as a guide to implementation and to check the
progress of the project as it develops.
1.2 How to Use This Document
We expect people with different skill sets and needs will use this document.
This document is intended for everyone involved on the project including, but Not limited to:
Programmers,
Designers,
Testers
And managers.
1.3 Scope of the Product
The scope of this project includes the redesign and build of Keystone’s Add/Update Listing Section.
1.4 Business Case for the Product
The Keystone Renovation Project Charter contains details on the full business case for this product. In general, the redesign of Keystone
is intended to create an industry leading application that helps MRIS support it’s customers to increase productivity and sell homes more
quickly through an interface that is easier to user and provides smart fields and system checks. It is anticipated that this application may
help attract new clients and associations to the MRIS suite of technologies and services.
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 4 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
2. General Description
The current Keystone application is outdated and the company has determined that it is in need of renovation. The Property Input
application is one of MRIS’ most important User applications – many other technologies, applications and services rely the User’s ability
and focus on entering full and accurate listing details. The System should allow users to add and edit details about the property and save
(before submitting to the MLS). Prior to submission, the details should be called “Property Profile” or “Subject Property Record.” After a
property profile is submitted to the MLS, it becomes a “Listing” or “Property Listing.”
2.1 Product Perspective
The redesign of Keystone should allow Users to more easily and efficiently create a property profile and post a listing to the MLS. Several
product features, tools and new capabilities are needed to accomplish this. The following list of “functional requirements” has been
identified.
a) Application should be organized to be intuitive - fields/descriptors located where a User would anticipate finding them.
1. New Categories (see 3.4a)
2. Descriptors should be logically positioned within multi-choice dropdown lists (alphabetically sorted or re-ordered
based on the most common selections by all Users of the System)
3. System should attempt to minimize user clicks and extra keystrokes
4. System should display field descriptors that are relevant based on the property type and transaction type – plus if a
field triggers a situational/conditional field, System should activate appropriate fields.
5. Field Visibility – all appropriate fields be always visible (although situational fields should be greyed out and
“inactive”).
b) System should allow Admin Users to edit Field Headers without the need for a release (using internal approval procedures to be
developed at future date
c) System should allow Admin Users to add new descriptors to existing fields without the need for a release (using internal
approval procedures to be developed at future date)
d) A “Help” feature should be available to provide education and background on the field (content or functionality).
1. The User should be able to “turn on/off” the help so that assistance can be provided constantly or “on-demand”
(hover)
2. “Content help” should provide useful definitions or background on the type of detail that is needed
3. “Functionality help” should provide assistance with how or why a field operates in a certain way (e.g. To activate
Basement Type, Choose Basement = Yes first)
4. System should allow Admin Users to add and modify Help text without the need for a release (using internal approval
procedures to be developed at future date.
e) A “search” feature (field) should provide Users with assistance (link to) on how to find the requested field and/or descriptor.
f) Fields should be “smart” – allowing Users to use keyboard or mouse to select descriptors. If typing, an auto-complete function
should try to assist with possible fields.
g) New Descriptor format – TAGS should be associated as necessary. These should include: Amenity, Eco-Friendly and others as
identified.
h) Property input (and updates) should be able to be managed by Agent teams.
1. Agent of Record (AOR) should be identified upon log-in.
2. System should note when alternative agents make revisions to property listing.
3. New fields should be added to Keystone (Cornerstone) to acknowledge teams (multiple Realtors) representing buyers
i. System should allow reporting for transactions involving more than one Realtor
i) System should provide visual tracking of data entry progress (bars and percentage) using a variation of the landing page
algorithm.
j) System should keep log of all entries in which user entered including date and time both pre and post submission to MLS.
k) System should provide option to preview how the Listing will be displayed in Matrix (full detail report) and HomesDataBase
l) System should remember where User last entered data and allow User to return upon log-in
1. Recall should be for each property profile/listing in the Users work area
m) User should be able to create templates for data sections that are likely to have commonality (e.g. community details, kitchen
appliance/feature packages etc.)
n) Where possible and logical – the use of images (even in field select boxes) should be available to assist with proper selection
(e.g. Architectural style, door type, floorplan layout etc)
o) System should provide preview (printed or on-line) of property details with method for “approving” prior to submitting
property to the MLS.
p)
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 5 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
2.2 Product Functions
The Keystone Add/Update Listing Section allows the users to navigate via a vertical tab format, in order to update (but not limited to) the
following data:











Address
Listing information
Marketing information
Financial information
Building information
Lot/Land information
Community information
Marketing information
Commercial information - planned in future iteration of this document
Lot Only
Multi-Family – planned in future iteration of this document
2.3 User Characteristics
While the MRIS user will mirror the general Internet user, a few differences are worth pointing out:
Experience – Ranges from new and part time agents, to seasoned agents who have been using Keystone for years.
Specialty – Many Users only list properties occasionally. For these Users, each log-in feels like “the first time.” Listing Agents (Power
Users), need speed and system shortcuts to help them more efficiently and effectively run their business. Additional market changes
(increased distressed properties, auctions, investors) make it necessary to provide assistance and education for our Users.
Age/Gender – During the market downturn, the industry is seeing some changes in demographics (younger), however the historical
demographic is (and continues to skew) towards females age 42-55.
2.4 General Constraints
Keystone will work within existing Cornerstone database and utilize (as much as possible) the existing business rules library.
2.5 Assumptions and Dependencies
The redesign of Keystone will continue to be delivered via the Internet and be browser compatible with the top browsers according to
web analytics. It is also a requirement that the Renovated Keystone Property Input Application work with the iPad (via Safari browser).
See section 3.1 for specific browser requirements.
2.5.1 Existing Fields
It is anticipated that the majority of existing fields, descriptors and business rules will be kept in place. New fields and descriptors have
been identified (documented in Exhibit B Taxonomy > New Fields Descriptors Worksheet) and in this document. When a rule change has
been identified, it has been included in this document.
3.0 Specific Requirements
This section of the document lists specific requirements for Keystone Redesign. Requirements are divided into the following sections:
System requirements. These are requirements for browser and other User operating system requirements are documented.
Integration requirements. These are detailed specifications describing the functions the system must be capable of doing.
Security Requirements
User Interface requirements. These are requirements about the user interface, which may be expressed as a list, as a narrative, or as
images of screen mock-ups.
Admin Maintenance Update Tool. These are requirements regarding the Maintenance tool, in order to update Keystone, and update the
fields easily.
3.1 System Requirements
The User will require an Internet browser. Keystone should work in all the major browsers including but Not limited to:


Internet Explorer (version 8 – primary and 9, as secondary)
Safari (Version 6533.18.5)
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 6 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section

Firefox (version 5.0)

Chrome (version 12.0.742.122)

IPad Safari
NOTE: these will be reviewed and updated prior to each Sprint with the product and development teams.
3.2 Integration Requirements
Keystone will continue to use Cornerstone as its main database and structure.
3.3 Security Requirements
Users will continue to MRIS log-in processes and procedures and be required to abide by MRIS security measures.
Team (needs) may require us to review and potentially revise our security procedures.
3.4 Admin Maintenance Update Tool
Administrative Users (MRIS staff) should have the ability to add/update descriptors to existing fields (without the aid of developers
and/or need to do a formal release). Additional functionality should include:
Admin User – Revise existing field descriptor
Admin User – Add new descriptor to existing field
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 7 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
3.4 User Interface Requirements
a) The redesign of Keystone begins with the new Landing page, shown below (established and build in R3). While the
homepage will allow the user to complete many tasks, it will also provide the launching point for a user to “Add a
New Listing” or “Edit Listing.” This document will take each item on the Add/Update Listing Section (otherwise known
as the Property Input Application) and specify its layout, characteristics, functions, and User/System interactions.
Figure 1 - Landing Page
General Navigation Standards & Details Vision Statement:
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 8 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Users of the current Keystone interface are familiar with a left align vertical navigation links. While we tested horizontal and vertical
navigation styles, we found the vertical navigation to be more understandable. The main difference is that that new taxonomy
navigation is shown in a more modular look (tabs).
Care was given to reorganize headings and sub-headings so that segment fields and descriptors are laid out in an intuitive way. While
Not intended to be a “wizard,” the tab format is meant to create a flow that moves from listing/transaction/marketing and financial
details to interior property details > exterior property details > lot details > community description. A new prominent summary provides
a “check-out” process for catching the most important details or can used as a shortcut for “previously sold” properties.
User Stories:
User ….
Acceptance Criteria:
….
Illustration 1: Current vs. Renovated navigation format. Note: arrows show the new position of some fields.
Figure 2 - Current Keystone vs Renovated Keystone
b)
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Major tab headings in the renovated Keystone will include:
Page 9 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
3/11/16 10:46 PM
R4 – Add/Update Section
Listing
Promotion
Financial
Building
Lot Details
Community
Summary
Page 10 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Navigation Breakdown – NOTE: It is suggested that part of the Help Text include a “Beginner MODE” In order to help Users find out what
is “in” a tab, the System should allow the User to hover over the tab and see a layout similar to the bullets below (need to be edited by
Training and Marketing).
The “Listing” tab focuses on the details that ensure an agent is compensated along with how to list the property and includes:

Essentials – Agent ID#, Compensation terms, Type of Property/Ownership etc.

Transaction – Descriptors and details around documentation for closing the sale. New and frequent links are provided to
DocCentral to reinforce behavior that will result in high “scores” (landing page)

Remarks – Arguably the most important and flexible agent details about a property, this section is Now emphasized at the front
portion of the input process Agent Contact – section provides new fields requested by users (primary contact, back-up agent
etc)

Agent and Seller Contact– section provides new fields requested by users (email address, best way to contact etc.)
The “Promotion” tab focuses on media and services to help actively merchandise the property

Media Connect – Photo upload (video to come at some future date)

Showings – Details and link to Showing Assist (3rd Party provider)

Open Houses – Details about upcoming open houses – new data fields to make promoting easier

Marketing – Quick link to Imprev marketing suite
The “Financial” tab focuses on current and future lending details and includes a newly updated section for promoting to investors.

Lending – Current and potential financing options

Fees – Appropriate fees based on type of property - new calculating fields

Taxes – Auto fill from public records and additional governmental issues and details

Investment – Calculating fields and specific fields for different asset types
The “Building” tab focus on materials and systems – plus interior details

Exterior Essentials – Dwelling type and measurements

Systems and Utilities – Overview of heating, cooling, plumbing etc.

Building Materials – Includes building materials, foundation types and major system

Interior Essentials – Summary of Levels, Rooms and room counts

Interior Details – room by room descriptions of flooring and other features
The “Lot Details” tab focuses on exterior descriptors (land around a building and Land Only details)

Essentials – General details on measurements, access and parking

Details – Includes status and zoning (more for Land Only properties)

Farm Essentials – Captures general building, agricultural/livestock, and land details.
The “Community” tab focuses on surrounding community features and access to “things to do.”

Essentials – Includes Schools and mapping

Car Optional – Captures details for proximity to services and things to do (includes possible integration with Walkscore). Can
work for urban and planned communities in suburban settings.

Water Oriented – New detailed fields for identifying attributes of properties located near water (multiple bodies of water)

Golf/Tennis Oriented – Access to club and courses are documented with these new fields

Sr. Living – Special new section to document and market properties with amenities for seniors

Outdoor Oriented – Captures details about the properties proximity to many types of outdoor activities – can work for
suburban and rural areas.
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 11 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
3.4.1 Add/Updated Section Home Page
Figure 3 - Add/Update Section Home Page
ID 3.4.1.1.
STANDARD MRIS HEADER
Description/Notes
1. Functionality same as R3 landing page
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 12 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
ID 3.4.1.2.
R4 – Add/Update Section
SECTION TITLE
Description/Notes
1.
Text: “Add/Update Listing”
User Actions
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.1.3.
LISTING ADDRESS – NAV/LINK
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Display Text
Listing Address + Tax ID
Includes:
Unit number
Street
City
State
Change – Nav/Link
Property Type
MLS # unless status = Unsubmitted then Property Type
User Actions
Click Change to update Address Info
System Response
Open Address Info in new light box – see 3.4.1.30 for details
ID 3.4.1.4.
KEY WORD SEARCH FIELD
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Text in Field Search Box: “Search For Field/Descriptor”
Search Parameters:
Field Headers, Full or Partial (Example: “Type of Ownership” or “Ownership”)
Field Selections (Example: “Fee Simple”)
System should be able to find parts of words
System should use Synonym resource to find similar words
Admin should be able to add words to list (without need for release).
Search Trigger: Hitting “Return” button on keyboard or clicking magnifying glass in Field Search box begins search
Help text: Type in a term or detail you’d like to find and the system will try to find it and provide a link to the appropriate field.
User Action
Type key field name
Hit “Return” key on keyboard
or
Click Magnifying Glass
System Response
For details on Field Search box results - see table 3.4.2a
ID 3.4.1.5.
3/11/16 10:46 PM
PREFERENCES BUTTON
Page 13 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Description/Notes
1. No functional change from R3 - See Landing Page Design Requirements Document , Table 3.4.2b, for Preferences Light box
details).
2. Help Text: Training to supply.
ID 3.4.1.6.
LAST UPDATE TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Display Last History
“Agent of Record:”
If Agent of Record = Agent logged in then Display “ME” otherwise Display Agent First and Last Name
Display Date and Time (updated after every Save of listing) by Agent name
User Action
None
System Response
Display Agent of Record and Last Update for each update
ID 3.4.1.7.
PROGRESS BAR
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Percent complete calculated on all mandatory fields completed.
When using MRIS Assist, use both mandatory and optional fields to describe and display percentage of completeness (TBD)
Optional fields can be presented as portion of remaining fields – potentially separate line – image)
Help Text: Training Department to provide
User Action
None
System Response
Progress Bar updates as user completes mandatory fields throughout process.
ID 3.4.1.8.
SAVE AND PRINT - BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Button
Button Text: “Save and Print”
Help Text: Training Department to provide
User Action
Clicks to print current information in listing
System Response
Saves new data, prints listing
ID 3.4.1.9.
SAVE AND EXIT - BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Button Text: “Save and Exit”
Help Text: Training Department to provide
User Action
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 14 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Click to exit current listing
System Response
Save new data, exit listing, display landing page
ID 3.4.1.10.
SUBMIT TO MLS - BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Drop down button
Options:
Submit Now
Submit Later – as provided in R3
Help Text: Training Department to provide
User Action
Click to submit current list to MLS
System Response
See table 3.4.3a for functionality details
ID 3.4.1.11.
HELP TIPS - NAV/LINK
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Toggle Show/Hide (default)
Display Help Tips to right of Field in Input Area
Content to be developed by Education department
See Appendix A for details
User Action
Click to Show/Hide Help Tips
System Response
Show/Hide Help Tips
Change Display
Note: Provide some type of Feedback format for first 90 days of release
ID 3.4.1.12.
PREVIEW LISTING - NAV/LINK
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Toggle Show (default)/Hide Preview Listing
Display current listing as it would display online in Light box
Preview format and layout will be provided by Matrix/Homesdatabase product managers at later date
User Action
Click to view current listing as it would display online
System Response
Open current listing in online format in Light Box
ID 3.4.1.13.
HORIZONTAL INFORMATION TAB
Description/Notes
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 15 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Location: Top Left of Input Area
Text: Varies
Options:
Listing
Promotion
Financial
Building
Lot Details
Community
Summary
No Help Text necessary
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.1.14.
LISTING - VERTICAL NAVIGATION TAB
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Options:
Essentials
Transaction Details
Remarks
Contact Info
Progress Bar calculated same as ID 3.4.7 only mandatory fields included within each Vertical Tab
User Actions
Clicks on link within Tab to display page
System Response
Display selected page in input area
See 3.4.4a for “Essentials” page details
See 3.4.4b for “Transaction Details” page details
See 3.4.4c for “Remarks” page details
See 3.4.4d for “Contact Info” page details
ID 3.4.1.15.
PROMOTIONS – VERTICAL NAVIGATION TAB
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Options:
Media
Documents
Showings
Open Houses
Marketing
User Action
Clicks on link within Tab to display page
System Response
Display selected page in input area
See 3.4.5a for “Media” page details
See 3.4.5b for “Documents page details
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 16 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
See 3.4.5c for “ Showing Instructions” page details
See 3.4.5d for “Open Houses” page details
ID 3.4.1.16.
FINANCIAL – VERTICAL NAVIGATION TAB
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Options:
Lending
Fees
Tax Info
Investment
User Action
Click on link within Tab to display
System Response
Display selected page in input area
See 3.4.6a for “Lending” page details
See 3.4.6b for “Fees” page details
See 3.4.6c for “Tax Info” page details
See 3.4.6d for “Investment” page details
ID 3.4.1.17.
BUILDING – VERTICAL NAVIGATION TAB
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Options:
Exterior Essentials
System Utilities
Building Materials
Exterior Features
Interior Essentials
Room Details
User Actions
Click on link within Tab to display selected page
System Response
Display selected page in input area
See 3.4.7a for “Exterior Essentials” page details
See 3.4.7b for “System Utilities” page details
See 3.4.7c for “Building Materials” page details
See 3.4.7d for “Exterior Features” page details
See 3.4.7e for “Interior Essentials” page details
See 3.4.7f for “Room Details” page details
ID 3.4.1.18.
LOT DETAILS – VERTICAL NAVIGATION TAB
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Options:
Essentials
Details
Farm Essentials
User Actions
Click on link within Tab to display selected page
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 17 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
System Response
Display selected page in input area
See 3.4.8a for “Essentials” page details
See 3.4.8b for “Details” page details
See 3.4.8c for “Farm Essentials” page details
ID 3.4.1.19.
COMMUNITY – VERTICAL NAVIGATION TAB
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Options:
Essentials
Car Optional
Sr. Living
Golf/Tennis
Water Oriented
Outdoor Recreation
User Action
Click on link within Tab to display selected page
System Response
Display selected page in input area
See 3.4.9a for “Essentials” page details
See 3.4.9b for “Car Optional” page details
See 3.4.9c for “Sr. Living” page details
See 3.4.9d for “Golf/Tennis” page details
See 3.4.9e for “Water Oriented” page details
See 3.4.9f for “Outdoor Recreation” page details
ID 3.4.1.20.
SUMMARY – VERTICAL NAVIGATION TAB
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Options:
Mandatory Template
Amenities Template
Eco-Friendly Template
Top-Searched Template
Short Term Rental Template
User Actions
Click link within Tab to display page
System Response
Display selected page within input area
See 3.4.10a for “Mandatory Template” page details
See 3.4.10b for “Amenities Template” page details
See 3.4.10c for “Eco-Friendly Template” page details
See 3.4.10d for “Top Searched Template” page details
See 3.4.10e for “Short Term Rental Template” page details
ID 3.4.1.21.
BREADCRUMBS – DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1. Non-functional navigation
2. Title of Page
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 18 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.1.22.
UPDATE REMARKS – BUTTON – STANDARD ON EVERY PAGE
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Mandatory Field = No
Button Text: “Update Remarks”
User Action
Click to update remarks
System Response
Open Add/Update Remarks light box – same functionality as R3
ID 3.4.1.23.
PREVIOUS - BUTTON – STANDARD ON EVERY PAGE
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Mandatory Field = No
Button Text: “Previous”
Standard on every page
Disabled only if on Listing > Essentials page
If on First Page of a Tab, display Last Page of Previous Tab,
For Example: If on “Car Options” Previous would display “Farm” Page of “Lot/Property” Tab.
If on any other page, display previous page, for example:
If on “Water” Page of “Community” Tab, Previous would display “Golf/Tennis” Page of “Community” Tab.
User Action
Click to view Previous page in Input Are
System Response
Saves form information
Perform Error Handling – same as R3
Displays previous page
Update “Last Update” in Header
ID 3.4.1.24.
MANDATORY FIELD - DISPLAY EXAMPLE – STANDARD ON EVERY PAGE
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Image/Text
Display only
Standard on every page
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.1.25.
3/11/16 10:46 PM
RESET - BUTTON – STANDARD ON EVERY PAGE
Page 19 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = No
Standard on every page
Button Text: “Reset”
Help Text: Training Department to provide
User Action
Click to reset page to default settings
System Response
Clear current page to default settings
ID 3.4.1.26.
OPTIONAL FIELD - DISPLAY EXAMPLE – STANDARD ON EVERY PAGE
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Image/Text
Display only
Standard on every page
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.1.27.
SAVE AND CONTINUE - BUTTON – STANDARD ON EVERY PAGE
Description/Notes
1. Mandatory Field = No
2. Standard on every page
3. Button Text: “Save and Continue”
4. Disable if on Summary > Short Term Rental Template page
5. If on Last Page of Tab, display First Page of Next Tab.
6. For Example: If on “Farm” Page of “Lot/Property” Tab, “Save and Continue” button would display “Car Options: al” Page of
“Community” Tab.
7. If on any other page, display next page, for example:
8. If on “Car Options: al” Page of “Community” Tab, “Save and Continue,” would display “Sr. Living” Page of “Community” Tab.
9. Help Text: Training Department to provide.
User Action
Click to display next page
System Response
Saves page information
Perform Error handling – same as R3
Displays next page
Update “Last Update” in Header
ID 3.4.1.28.
STANDARD MRIS FOOTER
Description/Notes
1.
Functionality same as R3 landing page
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 20 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
ID 3.4.1.29. ADDRESS INFO – LIGHT BOX
Figure 4 - Address Info Light Box
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Light Box Title = “Address Info: “ + Current Address (same as R3)
Trigger: Click “Change” after Address in Add/Update Header
Field include:
Street Number
Street Direction
Street Name
Street Type
Unit Number
City
State
Zip Code
Cancel
Save Changes
User Actions
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 21 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Update fields if needed
Click Save changes button
-- or -Cancel to close light box
System Response
Save form information to following fields:
Error handling – if Mandatory fields are not completed, fields are stroked red with messaged at top of light box “The following fields need
to be completed before proceeding: “ List Mandatory fields not completed in bulleted list in the following order:

Street Name

City

State

Zip Code
ID 3.4.1.29.1
ZIP CODE – NUMBER FIELD
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
Field Header Text: “Zip Code”
Two Fields side by side
1st Field:
Mandatory Field: Yes
5 digits
Auto-fill from address selected during search
If no information then field left blank
Set General - ZIP Codes
When completed automatically tab to 2nd field
When completed automatically update following fields:
State
City
2nd Field:
Mandatory Field: No
4 digits
Auto-fill from address selected during search, if available from previous listing or tax records
If no information then field left blank
Set Street Direction - ZIP 4
When completed automatically update following fields:
Street Number
Street Direction
Street Name
Street Type
Unit Number
If needed, use website similar to http://www.melissadata.com/lookups/zip4.asp for address look ups
User Action
Type zip code if change is needed
System Response
Set General - ZIP Codes
Automatically tab to next field
Update State and City fields
Set Street Direction - ZIP 4
Update Street Number, Street Direction, Street Name, Street Type, and Unit Number
ID 3.4.1.29.2
STATE – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 22 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “State”
Options:
DC
DE
MD
PA
VA
WV
Auto-fill from address selected during search
If no information then field display “Select One”
User Action
Click to expand drop down box to change state if needed
System Response
Set Property - Address - State
ID 3.4.1.29.3
CITY – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Test: “City”
Options depend on Zip code selected
Auto-fill from address selected during search
If no information then field displays “Select One”
User Action
Click to expand drop down box to change city if needed
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set General - Postal City
ID 3.4.1.29.4
STREET NUMBER – NUMBER FIELD
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandtory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Street Number”
Auto-fill from address selected during search with over write capability
If no information then field is left blank
User Action
Type new street number, if current information is incorrect of blank
System Response
Set Street Direction - Street Number
ID 3.4.1.29.5
STREET DIRECTION – SINGLE SELECT DROPN DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Street Direction”
Options:
North
North West
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 23 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
R4 – Add/Update Section
North East
East
South
South East
South West
West
Auto-fill from address selected during search with over write capability
If no information then field is left blank
User Action
Click to expand drop down box to select new street direction
System Response
Set Street Direction
ID 3.4.1.29.6
STREET NAME – TEXT FIELD
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “Street Name”
Auto-fill from address selected during search with over write capability
If no information then field is left blank
User Action
Type new street name, if current information is incorrect of blank
System Response
Set General - Street Name
ID 3.4.1.29.7
STREET TYPE – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Street Type (Optional)”
See Appendix A for Sort details
Options:
Acres
Alley
Annex
Arcade
Avenue
Bay
Bayou
Beach
Bend
Bluff
Bottom
Boulevard
Branch
Bridge
Brook
Burg
Bypass
Camp
Canyon
Cape
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 24 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
51.
52.
53.
54.
55.
56.
57.
58.
59.
60.
61.
62.
63.
64.
65.
66.
67.
68.
69.
70.
71.
72.
73.
74.
75.
76.
77.
78.
79.
80.
81.
82.
83.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Causeway
Center
Chase
Circle
Cliffs
Club
Cluster
Common
Comn
Corner
Corners
Corridor
Course
Court
Courts
Cove
Creek
Crescent
Crest
Crossing
Crossover
Crossroad
Crossroads
Curve
Dale
Dam
Dell
Divide
Driveway
DRS
End
Esplanade
Estate
Estates
Expressway
Extension
Fall
Falls
Fare
Ferry
Field
Fields
Flats
Flts
Ford
Forest
Forge
Fork
Forks
Fort
Freeway
Gap
Gardens
Garth
Gate
Gateway
Glen
Grade
Green
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 25 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
84. Grove
85. Harbor
86. Haven
87. Heights
88. Highway
89. Hill
90. Hills
91. Hollow
92. Inlet
93. Island
94. Islands
95. Isle
96. Junction
97. Key
98. KML
99. Knoll
100. Knolls
101. Lake
102. Lakes
103. Land
104. Landing
105. Lane
106. Light
107. Line
108. Loaf
109. Locks
110. Lodge
111. Loop
112. Mall
113. Manor
114. Meadow
115. Meadows
116. Mews
117. Mill
118. Mills
119. Mission
120. Mount
121. Mountain
122. Mountains
123. Neck
124. Nook
125. North
126. Northeast
127. Northway
128. Northwest
129. Orchard
130. Oval
131. Overlook
132. Park
133. Parkway
134. Pass
135. Passage
136. Path
137. Peninsula
138. Pike
139. Pines
140. Place
141. Plain
142. Plains
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 26 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
143. Plaza
144. Point
145. Pond
146. Port
147. Prairie
148. Quay
149. Radial
150. Ranch
151. Rapids
152. Rest
153. Ridge
154. Riding
155. River
156. RoadRoadway
157. Route
158. Row
159. Rue
160. Run
161. Shoal
162. Shoals
163. Shore
164. Shores
165. Southeast
166. Southway
167. Spring
168. Springs
169. Spur
170. Square
171. Station
172. Strait
173. Stravenue
174. Stream
175. Street
176. Summit
177. Terrace
178. Trace
179. Track
180. Tract
181. Trail
182. Trailer
183. Tunnel
184. Turn
185. Turnpike
186. Undefined
187. Union
188. Valley
189. Viaduct
190. View
191. Views
192. Village
193. Ville
194. Vista
195. Walk
196. Walkway
197. Wall
198. Way
199. Wells
200. Auto-fill from address selected during search with over write capability
201. If no information then field displays “Select One”
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 27 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
User Action
Click to expand drop down box to change Street Type if needed
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set General – Stret Type
ID 3.4.1.29.8
UNIT NUMBER – NUMBER FIELD
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Unit Number (Optional)
Auto-fill from address selected during search with over write capability
If no information then field is left blank
User Action
Type unit number, if applies, to change if needed
System Response
Set General - Unit #
ID 3.4.1.29.9
CANCEL – BUTTON; SAME FUNCTIONALITY AS R3
Description/Notes
1.
Same functionality as R3
User Action
Click button to return to Add/Update main page
System Response
Same functionality as R3
ID 3.4.1.29.10
SAVE CHANGES – BUTTON; SAME FUNCTIONALITY AS R3
Description/Notes
1.
Same functionality as R3
User Action
Click button to save changes
System Respons
Same functionality as R3
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 28 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
3/11/16 10:46 PM
R4 – Add/Update Section
Page 29 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
3.4.2 Field Search Box Results
Figure 5 - Field Search Results
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 30 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Search Field/Descriptor Widget Vision Statement:
The goal of the Search Field/Descriptor Widget is to enable a powerful new search capability to locate the best property data descriptors.
Since many Users will only use the Property Input Application on an in frequent basis, locating the proper field may be challenging.
Additionally, property descriptors might only be used in specific instances causing even a Power User challenges. The new Search Widget
should allow for broad search results based on the User’s selected text and work to improve results through the use of a Synonym library.
Users Story: User wants to find fields or descriptor and doensn’t know where they’re located.
System should provide search capability to help and take user to possible fields that meet their criteria.
Acceptance Criteria:
ID 3.4.2.1.
Previous - Nav/Link
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Format is as follows:
“< ” User’s last page
Help Text: Training Department to provide.
User Action
Click to return to previous page, this action will remove any current searches
System Response
Clear Search criteria
Display previous page
ID 3.4.2.2.
New Search – Button
Description/Notes
1.
Button text: “New Search”
User Action
Click to perform a new search
System Response
Clear current search criteria
Clear current search matches
Display Keyword Search Field in current page directly below New Search button
ID 3.4.2.3.
Search Criteria – Display Text
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Format is as follows:
“Search Criteria: “ User’s Input (key field name)”
Help Text: Training Department to provide
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.2.4.
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Exact Found Matches - Display Text
Page 31 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Text: ““Search Results - Found “ (count) “ Exact matches”
Help Text: Training Department to provide
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.2.5.
Search Results - Nav/Link
Description/Notes
1. Display: Tab > Page > Field
2. Results display in order of Tabs and Pages in navigation
3. Text: Marketing/Training to supply description of displayed results (e.g. The following list was found … you may click on a link
to…
4. Sort Order:
5. Listing
6. Essentials
7. Sale Transaction Details
8. Rental Transaction Details
9. Remarks
10. Contact Info
11. Promotion
12. Media
13. Showing Details
14. Open Houses
15. Marketing
16. Financial
17. Lending
18. Fees
19. Tax Info
20. Investment
21. Building
22. Exterior Essentials
23. System/Utilities
24. Building Materials
25. Interior Essentials
26. Interior Details
27. Lot/Land
28. Essentials
29. Details
30. Farm Essentials
31. Community
32. Essentials
33. Car Optional
34. Sr. Living
35. Golf/Tennis
36. Water Oriented
37. Outdoor Recreation
38. For example: User searches for “Fees.” Search results displays all fields matching “Fees” beginning with Listing Tab through
Community Tab.
39. Additional Help Text may be required – Training Department to provide
User Action
Click on the link to display selected page
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 32 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
System Response
Display selected page with selected field displayed as active
For example: If a user selects Financial > Fees > Fee Deposit Types, display Financial > Fees, with the field Deposit Fee Types as the active
field.
See Appendix A, section “Active Fields, for details.
ID 3.4.2.6.
Similar Found Matches – Display Text
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Text: ““Search Results - Found “ (count) “ Similar matches”
Help Text: Training Department to provide
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.2.7.
Similar Search Results – Nav/Link
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Same functionality and sort order as 3.4.2.4
Similar Search Results should include synonyms, ie: Price is included in Similar Search Results for Fees.
User Action
Same action as 3.4.2.4
System Response
Same functionality as 3.4.2.4
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 33 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
3.4.3 Submit to MLS Functionality
Figure 6 - Submit to MLS Button expanded
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 34 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
ID 3.4.3.1.
R4 – Add/Update Section
SUBMIT NOW BUTTON – NO FUNCTIONAL CHANGE FROM R3
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Text: “Submit Now”
Help Text: Training Department to provide.
User Action
Click to Submit Listing to MLS immediately
If No errors and listing is submitted successfully, display Message box stating “You have successfully submitted your listing to the MLS.”
If errors found, display “Found Errors” Light box (see table 3.4.3b)
System Response
Check listing for Errors
If No Errors, submit listing to MLS (No functional change from R3)
System should return interstitial/pop-up that provides possible next steps for the User (e.g. transfer to Showing Assist to add details,
transfer to Imprev Marketing center to set-up campaign, return to Landing page – others?) All transfers should carry the MLS#/details so
that the User is presented with the 3rd Parties’ page for the recent input listing.
If errors found, display “Found Errors” light box with all errors are shown
ID 3.4.3.2.
SUBMIT LATER BUTTON – NO FUNCTIONAL CHANGE FROM R3
Description/Notes
1.
Text: “Submit Later”
User Actions
Click to schedule Submission of current listing to MLS
Opens “Schedule Submission to MLS” light box
System Response
Display “Schedule Submission to MLS” light box (No functional change from Release 3 - Keystone Landing Page Design Requirements
Document, see table 3.4.11b for details)
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 35 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
3.4.4a Listing > Essentials
Figure 7 - Listing > Essential Page
Listing Tab Vision Statement:
The Listing Tab contains fields and descriptors aimed at supporting the listing (association/MLS required fields) and transaction of selling
the property. These fields were chosen to be in the “first tab” because many details in this section also describe who should get paid.
Users should quickly work down fields with very view conditional or situational fields in this section.
User Story:
User wants to enter details pertaining to “Listing” the property. These include descriptors the MLS and Assocations require for the agent
to get compensated and other details specific to the sales/rental transaction.
Acceptance Criteria:
ID 3.4.4a.1.
BREADCRUMBS – DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
Field Header Text: “Listing > Essentials”
User Action
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 36 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.4a.2.
TYPE OF SALE - RADIO BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “Type of Sale”
Options:
Sale
Rental
No default
Help Text: None
User Action
Click to select either Sale or Rental
System Response
Set - General Sale/Rental
If Type of Sale = Rental enable Type of Rental
ID 3.4.4a.3.
TYPE OF OWNERSHIP - SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “Type of Ownership”
Options:
Condo
Coop
Fee Simple
Ground Rent
Rental Apartment
Help Text: Training Department to provide
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Single select drop down box expands
Set - General Ownership
ID 3.4.4a.4.
TYPE OF RENTAL- SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
10. Mandatory Field = Yes if Type of Sale = Rental
11. Enabled only if Type of Sale = Rental
12. Field Header Text: “Type of Rental”
13. Location: Browser right of Type of Ownership
14. Options:
15. Standard
16. Rent to Own
17. Short-term
18. Vacation
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 37 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
Make selection
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set Type of Rental – NEW FIELD
If Type Rental = Vacation Rental or Short-Term then enable Rental Template Nav/Link
ID 3.4.4a.5.
SHORT TERM RENTAL TEMPLATE – NAV/LINK
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Nav/Link Text: “Go To The Quick Entry > Short Term Rental Template”
Enabled only if Type of Rental = Vacation Rental
User Action
Click to view Short Term Rental Template
System Response
Display Short Term Rental Template
ID 3.4.4a.6.
COMPARABLE PURPOSE ONLY - RADIO BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “Comparable Purpose Only?”
Standard Radio button options see Appendix A for details
Help Text: Training Department to provide
User Actions
Click to select Comparable Purpose Only
System Response
If Comparable Purpose Only = Yes enable Modified Template Nav/Link – short cut to template in Quick Entry Tab
Set General - Comparable Purpose Only
ID 3.4.4a.7.
MODIFIED MANDATORY TEMPLATE - NAV/LINK
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Field Header Text: “Go directly to Modified Field Template”
Help Text: Training Department to provide
User Actions
Click to view
System Response
Display selected page
ID 3.4.4a.8.
STATUS - SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
Mandatory Field = Yes
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 38 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
2. Field Header Text: “Status”
3. Options:
4. Unsubmitted
5. Active
6. Application Registered
7. Contingency w/Kickout
8. Contingency w/No Kickout
9. Contract
10. Expired
11. Rented
12. Sold
13. Temp Off Market
14. Withdraw
15. Help Text: Training Department to provide definitions and explanation of conditional fields (date/times and accepting back-ups)
– see Appendix A for details
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Drop down box is expanded
Set - General Status
If using MRISAssist Status = Unsubmitted
If the following status is selected enable Close Date, Off Market Date and Accepting Backup Offers:
Contingency w/Kickout
Contingency w/No Kickout
Contract
Expired
Rented
Sold
ID 3.4.4a.9.
ACCEPTING BACKUPS – RADIO BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Accepting Backup Contracts (Optional)”
Location: Browser right of Off Market
Enabled only if the following statues are selected:
Contract
Contingency w/Kickout
Contingency w/No Kickout
Standard Radio button options see Appendix A
Help Text: Training Department to provide
User Actions
Click radio button
System Response
Set - Listing - Accepting Backups - NEW FIELD –
ID 3.4.4a.10. ADDITIONAL STATUS INFO– NAV/LINK
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = Yes if Status = Contingency w/Kick Out or Contingency w/Out Kick Out or Contract
Field Header Text: “+ Additional Status Info”
Enabled if Status = Contingency w/Kick Out, Contingency w/Out Kick Out or Contract
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 39 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
4.
5.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Display the following fields when selected:
Location: Below Acception Backups
User Action
Click to open Additional Status Info Light box
System Response
Open light box
Note: See ID 3.4.4a.24 for Additional Status Info light box details
ID 3.4.4a.11. LIST PRICE – NUMBER FIELD
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “List/Rental Price”
User Actions
Type price of listing
System Response
Set - General List Price
ID 3.4.4a.12. IN $1,000’S – CHECK BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “(In 000’s)”
Location: Browser right of List Price
User Action
Click check box to automatically format List Price in 1,000
System Response
Format List Price in !,000 format (see Matrix Residential – General – Search – List Price: formatting for details)
ID 3.4.4a.13. EXPIRATION DATE – DATE FIELD WITH CALENDAR
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “Expiration Date”
Format: mm/dd/yyyy
User Action
Type date
- OrClick Calendar Icon to Open Calendar to select date
System Response
Set - General Expiration Date
ID 3.4.4a.14. LISTING TYPE – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 40 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “Listing Type”
Options:
Exclusive Agency
Exclusive Right
Modified Exclusive
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set - General Listing Type
ID 3.4.4a.15. LIST DATE – SYSTEM GENERATED DATE FIELD
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “List Date”
System Generated based on date submitted to MLS
Location: Browser right of Listing Type
User Action
None
System Response
Auto-fill with date submitted to MLS
If listing is Scheduled, auto-fill with scheduled date
ID 3.4.4a.16. VALUE RANGE PRICING – RADIO BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Mandatory Field = No (Note, this was previously a Mandatory field and may need some explanation – especially for Prudential
Brokers)
Field Header Text: “Value Range Pricing? (Optional)”
Standard Radio button options see Appendix A
This previously a Mandatory field – business rule will need to be changed.
Help Text: Value Range Pricing provides two fields to establish a low and high range of acceptable price.
User Action
Click to set Value Range Pricing
System Response
Set - General Value Range Pricing
ID 3.4.4a.17. SELLER AUTHORIZES – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “Seller Does Not Authorize”
Options:
Listing on Internet
Listing Address on Internet
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 41 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Automated Valuation of Listing
Blogging Features
Listing In IDX
Listing Address in IDX
Listing in HDB
Listing Address in HDB
Uesr Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set the following fields to NO based on selections:
Seller authorizes listing on all websites including VOW sites
Seller authorizes display of Automated Valuation Model (AVM) on Websites including VOW sites
Seller authorizes listing address on all websites including VOW sites
Seller authorizes display of comments / blogging on Websites including VOW sites
Seller Authorizes Listing in IDX
Seller Authorizes Listing Address in IDX
Seller Authorizes Listing in HDB
Seller Authorizes Listing Address in HDB
ID 3.4.4a.18. BUYER-AGENT COMPENSATION – NUMBER FIELD
Desription/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “Buyer-Agent Compensation”
Character Format: $###,###,###.##
Help Text: Training Department to provide
User Actions
Type compensation amount
System Response
Set - Contract Info Buyer- Agent Compensation
ID 3.4.4a.19. SUB-AGENT COMPENSATION – NUMBER FIELD
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “Sub-Agent Compensation”
Character Format: $###,###,###.##
Help Text: Training Department to provide
User Actions
Type Sub-Agent compensation amount
System Response
Set - Contract Info Sub-Agent Compensation
ID 3.4.4a.20. ADDITIONAL COMPENSATION – NUMBER FIELD
Description/Notes
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 42 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
1.
2.
3.
4.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Additional Compensation (Optional)”
Character Format: $###,###,###.##
Help Text: Training Department to provide
User Actions
Type any additional compensation
System Response
Set - Contract Info Additional Compensation
ID 3.4.4a.21. DESIGNATED REPRESENTATIVE – RADIO BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “Designated Representative?”
Standard Radio button options see Appendix A
Help Text: Training Department to provide
User Actions
Click Yes to set designated representative
System Response
Set - Contract Info Designated Representative
ID 3.4.4a.22. DISCLOSED DUAL AGENCY – RADIO BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “Disclosed Dual Agency?”
Standard Radio button options see Appendix A
Help Text: Training Department to provide
User Actions
Click Yes to set Disclosed Dual Agency
System Response
Set - Contract Info Disclosed Dual Agency
ID 3.4.4a.23. VARIABLE RATE COMPENSATION – RADIO BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “Variable Rate Compensation?”
Standard Radio button options see Appendix A
Help Text: Training Department to provide
User Actions
Click Yes to set Variable Rate Compensation
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 43 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
System Response
Set - Contract Info Variable Rate Compensation
ID 3.4.4a.24. ADDITIONAL STATUS INFO – LIGHT BOX: NO FUNCTIONAL CHANGE FROM R3
Description/Notes
1.
User Action
System Response
ID 3.4.4a.24.1.CLOSE DATE – DATE FIELD WITH CALENDAR: NO FUNCTIONAL CHANGE FROM R3
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Mandatory Field = Yes if Status = Contract, Rented or Sold
Field Header Text: “Close Date (Optional)”
Location: Browser right of Status field
Standard Date Field with Calendar – see Appendix A for details
Display User Preferences if set
Enabled only if the following Statuses are selected:
Contract
Rented
Sold
Help Text: Training Department to edit – “Must select (see list) in order to access calendar.”
User Action
Type date
- OrClick Calendar Icon to Open Calendar to select date
System Response
Open Calendar to current month with current date selected
Set - General CloseDate/Off Market Date
ID 3.4.4a.24.2.OFF MARKET – DATE FIELD WITH CALENDAR: NO FUNCTIONAL CHANGE FROM R3
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Mandatory Field = Yes, if Status = Expired, Temp Off Market or Withdrawn
Field Header Text: “Off Market Date (Optional)”
Format: mm/dd/yyyy
Location: Browser right of Close Date
Display User Preferences if set
Standard Date with Calendar field – see Appendix A for details
Enabled only if the following Statuses are selected:
Expired
Temp Off Market
Withdrawn
Help Text: Training to Provide. Must select (see list) in order to access calendar.
User Action
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 44 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Type date
- OrClick Calendar Icon to Open Calendar to select date
System Response
Open Calendar to current month with current date selected
Set - General CloseDate/Off Market Date
ID 3.4.4a.24.3.CONTRACT DATE– DATE FIELD WITH CALENDAR: NO FUNCTIONAL CHANGE FROM R3
Description/Notes
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
Mandatory Field = Yes, if Status = Contract, Rented
Field Header Text: “Contract Date/Date Accepted”
Location: Browser right of Off Market Date
Standard Date with Calendar field – see Appendix A for details
Enabled only if the following Statuses are selected:
Contract
Rented
Help Text: Training to Provide.
User Action
Type date
- OrClick Calendar Icon to Open Calendar to select date
System Response
Open Calendar to current month with current date selected
Set - General Contract Date
ID 3.4.4a.24.4.SELLING AGENT NAME - TEXT BOX, BUTTON: NO FUNCTIONAL CHANGE FROM R3
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Mandatory Field = Yes if Status = Contract, Sold, Rented
Field Header Text: “Selling/Leasing Agent Name”
Enabled only if Status = Contract, Sold, Rented
Agent Name should be pulled from most used Agent Names first or Office Agent Names until System becomes “Smart”
Button Text: “Find Agent”
User Action
Type Agent Name
-- or -Click button to search for Agent
System Response
If Find Agent button is clicked open Find Agent wizard, when wizard is closed;
Set Selling/Leasing Agent ID associated with selected Agent name
ID 3.4.4a.24.5.TYPE OF CONTINGENCY – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX: NO FUNCTIONAL CHANGE FROM R3
Description/Notes
1. Mandatory Field = Yes, if Status = Contingency w/Kick Out or Contingency w/Out Kick Out
2. Field Header Text: “Type of Contingency”
3. Enabled only if the following Statuses are selected:
4. Contingency w/Kick Out
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 45 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Contingency w/Out Kick Out
Options:
Contingent on Appraisal
Home Inspection
Radon
Preliminary Letter
3rd Party Letter
Document Review
Gift Letter
Coop Board Review
Feasibility Study
Home Sale
Zoning Approval
When option is selected, enable Expiration Date in column 2 and Kickout Hours in column 3
Help Text: Training to Provide.
User Action
Click to expand drop down box, select type of contingency
System Response
Expand drop down box
Enable Expiration Date and Kickout Hours for corresponding Type of Contingency.
For example: If Contingent on Appraisal and Home Inspection are selected. Only Expiration Date and Kickout Hours for Contingent on
Appraisal and Home Inspection are enabled.
ID 3.4.4a.24.6.TYPE OF CONTINGENCY – DISPLAY TEXT: NO FUNCTIONAL CHANGE FROM R3
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Table – Column 1
Contingent on Appraisal
Home Inspection
Radon
Preliminary Letter
3rd Party Letter
Document Review
Gift Letter
Coop Board Review
Feasibility Study
Home Sale
Zoning Approval
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.4a.24.7.TYPE OF CONTINGENCY, EXPIRATION DATE – DATE WITH CALENDAR FIELD: NO FUNCTIONAL
CHANGE FROM R3
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Table – Column 2
Mandatory Field = Yes, if Status = Contingent w/Kick out or Contingent w/Out Kick Out
Field Header Text: “Expiration Date”
Standard Date with Calendar field – see Appendix A for details
Enabled Only if cooresponding Type of Contingency in Column 1 is selected in Multi Select drop down box
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 46 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
User Action
Type date
-- or -Click calendar icon
System Response
If Type of Contingency = Contingent on Appraisal, Set Contingent on Appraisal
If Type of Contingenct = Home Inspection, Set Home Inspection
If Type of Contingency = Radon, Set Radon
If Type of Contingency = Preliminary Lender Letter, Set Preliminary Lender Letter
If Type of Contingency = 3rd Party Approval, Set 3rd Party Approval
If Type of Contingency = Document Review, Set Document Review
If Type of Contingency = Gift Letter, Set Gift Letter
If Type of Contingency = Coop Board Approval, Set Coop Board Approval
If Type of Contingency = Other, Set Other
If Type of Contingency = Feasibility Study, Set Feasibility Study
If Type of Contingency = Home Sale, Set Home Sale
If Type of Contingency = Zoning Approval, Set Zoning Approval
ID 3.4.4a.24.8.TYPE OF CONTINGENCY, KICK OUT HOURS – NUMBER FIELD: NO FUNCTIONAL CHANGE FROM
R3
Description/Notes
1. Table – Column 3
2. Mandatory Field = Yes, if Status = Contingent w/Kick out
3. Field Header Text: “Kickout Hours”
4. Enabled Only if Status = Contingency w/Kickout and cooresponding Type of Contingency in Column 1 is selected in Multi Select
drop down box
User Action
Type number of hours til kick out
System Response
If Type of Contingency = Contingent on Appraisal, Set Contingent on Appraisal Kickout Hours
If Type of Contingenct = Home Inspection, Set Home Inspection Kickout Hours
If Type of Contingency = Radon, Set Radon Kickout Hours
If Type of Contingency = Preliminary Lender Letter, Set Preliminary Lender Letter Kickout Hours
If Type of Contingency = 3rd Party Approval, Set 3rd Party Approval Kickout Hours
If Type of Contingency = Document Review, Set Document Review Kickout Hours
If Type of Contingency = Gift Letter, Set Gift Letter Kickout Hours
If Type of Contingency = Coop Board Approval, Set Coop Board Approval Kickout Hours
If Type of Contingency = Other, Set Other Kickout Hours
If Type of Contingency = Feasibility Study, Set Feasibility Study Kickout Hours
If Type of Contingency = Home Sale, Set Home Sale Kickout Hours
If Type of Contingency = Zoning Approval, Set Zoning Approval Kickout Hours
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 47 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
3.4.4b Listing > Sale Transaction Details
Figure 8 - Listing > Transaction Details Page
Listing Tab – Transaction Details Vision Statement:
The Transaction sub heading provides access to fields concerned with how the listing will be sold. A new field (searchable) that identifies
if the sale is distressed reduces the number of clicks and potential conflicts. New methods for handling descriptors via disclosures and
prominent links to documents upload are other changes.
User Story:
User wishes to capture details surrounding the transaction…
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 48 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Acceptance Criteria:
Insert Here
ID 3.4.4b.1.
BREADCRUMBS – DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Field Header Text: “Listing > Sale Transaction Details”
Page enabled only if Type of Sale = Sale
Next button automatically displays if Type of Sale = Sale
Listing > Rental Transaction Details is disabled
User Actions
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.4b.2.
TRANSACTION TYPE – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Mandatory field = Yes
Field Header Text: “Transaction Type” – New Field
Options:
Standard Sale – New Descriptor
REO
Foreclosure
Potential Short Sale – New Descriptor
Undisclosed – New Descriptor
Help Text: Michelle in Compliance to provide (12/7 conversation)
Note: This becomes a new searchable field for Matrix and other applications
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
Make one selection
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set Transaction Type – NEW FIELD
If Transaction Type = “Foreclosure” then, Set Listing Details Foreclosure = Yes
If Transaction Type = “Potential Short Sale” then, Set Listing Details Potential Short Sale = Yes
If Transaction Type = REO, Foreclosure, Potential Short Sale OR Auction then Enable Short Cut Nav/Link
If Transaction Type = Foreclosure, select Foreclosure in Current Financing drop down box located in Financial > Lending page
If Transaction Type = REO, select Real Estate Owned property – REO in Current Financing drop down box located on Financial > Lending
page
ID 3.4.4b.3.
SHORT CUT - NAV/LINK
Description/Notes
1. Mandatory Field = No
2. Field Header Text: “Go Directly to the Quick Entry > Distressed Property Template”
3. Enabled only if Transaction Type = one of the following:
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 49 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
4.
5.
6.
R4 – Add/Update Section
REO
Foreclosure
Potential Short Sale
User Actions
Click to view the Distressed Property Template to quickly enter the listing
System Response
Display the Distressed Property Template
ID 3.4.4b.4.
CONTRACT INFORMATION – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1. Mandatory Field = No
2. Field Header Text: “Contract Information (Optional)”
3. Options:
4. As Is Condition Clause Required
5. Builder - Contract Required (if selected, can not select Builder – Hold Earnest Money, Builder – Write Contract)
6. Builder - Hold Earnest Money (if selected, can not select Builder – Contract Required, Builder – Write Contract)
7. Builder - Write Contract (if selected, can not select Builder – Contract Required, Builder – Hold Earnest Money)
8. Builder Warranty
9. Call Listing Agent - Contract Information
10. Compensation on all Homes (if selected, can not select Compensation – Base Price, Compensation – Listed Home Only,
Compensation – Settled Price, Compensation Vary with Project, or Compensation on Net Sales Price)
11. Compensation - Base Price (if selected, can not select Compensationon all Homes, Compensation – Listed Home Only,
Compensation – Settled Price, Compensation Vary with Project, or Compensation on Net Sales Price)
12. Compensation - Listed Home Only (if selected, can not select Compensation on all Homes, Compensation – Base Price,
Compensation – Settled Price, Compensation Vary with Project, or Compensation on Net Sales Price)
13. Compensation - Settled Price (if selected, can not select Compensation on all Homes, Compensation – Base Price,
Compensation – Listed Home Only, Compensation Vary with Project, or Compensation on Net Sales Price)
14. Compensation - Vary with Project (if selected, can not select Compensation on all Homes, Compensation – Base Price,
Compensation – Listed Home Only, Compensation – Settled Price, or Compensation on Net Sales Price)
15. Compensation on Net Sales Price (if selected, can not select Compensation on all Homes, Compensation – Base Price,
Compensation – Listed Home Only, Compensation – Settled Price, or Compensation Vary with Project)
16. Contingent Contract OK
17. Finders Fee
18. Home Warranty
19. Local Association Contract
20. No Extended Warranty
21. No Home Sale Contingency
22. None
23. Registration Requirement
24. Relocation/Bank Addendum
25. Special Addendum Required
26. Special Contract Required
27. Spec Home Available and Inventory Home Available
28. Subject to Third Party Approval
29. Tax Free Exchange Language Required
30. Help Text: Training Department to provide
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set - Contract Info - Contract Information
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 50 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
ID 3.4.4b.5.
R4 – Add/Update Section
DISCLOSURES – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1. Mandatory Field = Yes
2. Field Header Text: “Disclosures”
3. Options:
4. None
5. Agent Financial Interest
6. Agent Related to Owner
7. Build to Suit
8. Condition Pending Release
9. Conservation Area
10. Contract Purchaser
11. California Public Records Act - CPRA
12. Division potential
13. Encumbrances
14. Exception - Disclose/Disclaim
15. Flood Insurance - Required
16. Geo Hazard Zone
17. High Intensity Line
18. Historic Property
19. Infrastructure Fee Due at Settlement
20. Land Preservation Easement
21. Land Trust
22. Limited Service Brokerage
23. Maryland Department of Natural Resources
24. Mineral Lease
25. Mineral Resources Zone
26. Mineral Rights
27. Off-site Required
28. Other Known Environmental Hazards
29. Owner Real Estate Licensee
30. Pipeline
31. Proffers
32. Property Disclaimer
33. Property Disclosure
34. Room Added without Permit
35. Sell Entirely
36. Sewer Debt Fee Not Retired
37. Subject to Agreement Conservation Easement
38. Subject to Condominium / Homeowners Association Documents
39. Subject to Department of Veterans Affair Power of Attorney
40. Subject to a Potential Short Sale
41. Surface Lease
42. Underground Storage Tank
43. Under Lease
44. Use and Occupancy Permit
45. Utility Retirement Fee Not Paid
46. Water Debt Fee Not Retired
47. Zoning Issues
48. Flood Zone
49. Lead Based Paint
50. Note: Old Keystone broke pet descriptors out by Homeowners Association/Rent and had different wording for each – this new
layout streamlines the choices and makes them available regardless of the property type or other choice.
51. Help Text: Training Department to provide
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 51 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
System Response
Expand drop down box
If Disclosures = Historic Property, enable the following fields on Community > Essentials, expand “+ Other Information”:
Historic Designation ID
Local Historical District
Local Historical District URL
National Historic District
National Historic District URL
Set selected Disclosures in Selected Documents in Document Uploader – see ID 3.4.4b.25 for details
Set selected Disclosures in Promotions > Documents > Suggested Documents – see ID 3.4.5b.2 for details
Help Tips: Training Department to provide. Suggestion: Don’t forget to complete the History Property fields, now available on Community
> Essentials page (provide link)
Set - Disclosures - Disclosures
ID 3.4.4b.6.
DOCUMENTS – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Documents (Optional)”
Options:
Aerial – New Descriptor
Appraisal
Boundary Line Survey
Certificate of Occupancy
Conditions
Construction Drawings
Covenants
Deed
Easements
Energy Star Certification
Environmental Testing
Homeowners Association / Condominium Documents in Broker Office
House Plans Available
Inspection Results Available
Investment Analysis
Leases
Plans Available
Plat Plan
Public Works Agreement
Radon Test Results
Resale Package Available
Restrictions
Site Plan
Soil Ground Report
Survey - House Location (if selected, can not select Survey – Stake or Survey – Tree)
Survey – Stake (if selected, can not select Survey – House Location or Survey – Tree)
Survey –Tree (if selected, can not select Survey – House Location or Survey – Stake)
Third-Party Eco-friendly Certification
Water Agreement
Topographic Maps
Well Report
Feasibility Study
Timber Cruise
User Action
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 52 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Expand drop down box
Set selected Documents in Selected Documents in Document Uploader – see ID 3.4.4b.25 for details
Set selected Documents in Promotions > Documents > Suggested Documents – see ID 3.4.5b.2 for details
Set Documents - Documents
ID 3.4.4b.7.
UPLOAD DOCUMENTS – BUTTON
Description/Notes
1. Mandatory Field = No
2. Button Text: “Upload Documents”
3. Note: this is envisioned as one of the few times the user will navigate away during the input. A light box or new browser
window is suggested.
4. Help Text: Training Department to provide
User Actions
Click to Open DocCentral to upload documents
System Response
Save new information on current page
Update last update in header
Opens DocCentral to “All Documents” folder in light box with associated property ID or MLS#
See ID 3.4.4b.25 for Document Uploader light box details
ID 3.4.4b.8.
POSSESSION DETAILS – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “Possession Details”
Options:
Closing Date - 0-30 Days
Closing Date - 31-60 Days
Closing Date - 61-90 Days
Closing Date - 91-120 Days
Closing Date - 121-180 Days
Closing Date - 181+ Days
Coincide with Sellers Settlement
Subject to Existing Lease
Subject to Home of Choice
Delay Settlement
Immediate
Negotiable
Pre-Settlement
Seller Rent Back
Settlement
Help Text: Training Department to provide
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set - Listing Transaction Detail Possession
ID 3.4.4b.9.
3/11/16 10:46 PM
AUCTION – RADIO BUTTON
Page 53 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Auction? (Optional)”
Standard Radio button options see Appendix A
If Auction = Yes, Enable the following fields:
“Type of Auction (Optional)”
“Reserve Type”
“Deposit Amount”
“Auction Date”
“Auction Start”, “AM/PM ”
“Auction End (Optional)”
“AM/PM (Optional)”
“Location”
“Find on Map”
“Registration Deadline”
“Registration Link (Optional)”
“Browse to Link”
“Property History Documents (Optional)”
“Browse to Link”
Suggestion: Matrix displays List Price as “Starting Bid: $” + (List Price) and include potential new icon for Auctions
User Actions
Click Yes to set Auction
System Response
Set - NEW FIELD - Listing - Auction
ID 3.4.4b.10. SHORT CUT - NAV/LINK
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Go Directly to the Quick Entry > Distressed Property Template”
Enabled only if Auction = Yes
User Action
Click Short cut to enter Listing quickly
System Response
Display Quick Entry > Distressed Property Template
ID 3.4.4b.11. RESERVE TYPE – RADIO BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Mandatory Field = No, Yes if Auction = Yes
Field Header Text: “Reserve Type”
Enabled only if Auction = Yes
Options:
Absolute
With Reserve
Help Text: Need definitions for these new terms – to be provided by Training Department
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 54 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Expand drop down box
Set Listing Transaction Details Type of Auction - NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.4b.12. DEPOSIT AMOUNT – CURRENCY NUMBER BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Mandatory Field = No, Yes if Auction = Yes
Field Header Text: “Deposit Amount”
User Action
Type deposit amount
System Response
Set Auction Deposit Amount – NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.4b.13. AUCTION DATE – DATE FIELD WITH CALENDAR
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = No, Yes if Auction = Yes
Field Header Text: “Auction Date”
Standard Date Field with Calendar - see Apendix A for details
Enabled only if Auction = Yes
User Actions
Type date
- Or –
Click Calendar Icon to Open Calendar to select date
System Response
Open Calendar to current month with current date selected
Set - Auction Date - NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.4b.14. AUCTION START TIME – TIME FIELD DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = No, Yes if Auction = Yes
Field Header Text: “Auction Start”
Enabled only if Auction = Yes
Standard Time Options – see Appendix A for details
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set - Auction Time - NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.4b.15. AM/PM – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No, Yes if Auction = Yes
Field Header Text: “AM/PM”
Location: Browser right of “Auction Start Time”
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 55 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
4.
5.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Enabled only if Auction = Yes
Standard AM/PM Options – see Appendix A for details
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Concatenate Auction Time and AM/PM to Set - Auction Time - NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.4b.16. END TIME – TIME FIELD DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Auction End (Optional)”
Location: Browser right of “AM/PM”
Enabled only if Auction = Yes
Standard Time Options – see Appendix A for details
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Concatenate + Auction Time and AM/PM to Set - Auction Time - NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.4b.17. AM/PM – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “AM/PM (Optional)”
Location: Browser right of “End Time”
Enabled only if Auction = Yes
Standard AM/PM Options – see Appendix A for details
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Concatenate + Auction Time, AM/PM and End Time, AM/PM to Set - Auction Time - NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.4b.18. LOCATION – FREE FORM TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Mandatory Field = Yes if Auction = Yes
Field Header Text: “Location”
Enabled only if Auction = Yes
Full, Partial address includes:
Unit number, Street, City, ST, zip
Character Format: xxxxxx
User Actions
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 56 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Type address
System Response
Set - Auction Location - NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.4b.19. REGISTRATION DEADLINE – DATE FIELD WITH CALENDAR
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = Yes if Auction = Yes
Field Header Text: “Auction Registration Deadline”
Standard Date Field with Calendar – see Appendix A for details
Enabled only if Auction = Yes
User Actions
Type date
- Or –
Click Calendar icon to open Calendar
System Response
Display Calendar
Set - Auction Registration Deadline - NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.4b.20. REGISTRATION LINK – FREE FORM TEXT, URL
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Auction Site/Registration Link (Optional)”
Enabled only if Auction = Yes
Character Format: url
User Actions
Type URL
System Response
Set - Where/How to Register - NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.4b.21. BROWSE TO LINK – BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = No
Button Text: “Browse to Link”
Enabled only if Auction = Yes
Help Text: Training Department to provide. Suggestion: Place Auction web URL –property specific or registration page link
User Actions
Click to open new Browser window
System Response
Open new browser window
Once browser window is closed, copy history link into “Registration Link” field
ID 3.4.4b.22. BUYER’S PREMIUM – FREE FORM TEXT BOX
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 57 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Buyer’s Premium (Optional)”
Enabled only if Auction = Yes
Character Format: $#,###.##
Help Text: Training Department to provide
User Actions
Type amount
System Response
Set - Buyers Premium - NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.4b.23. PUBLIC RECORD DOCUMENTS – FREE FORM TEXT BOX, URL
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Public Records Documents (Optional)”
Enabled only if Auction = Yes
Character Format: url
User Actions
Type url
System Response
Set - Property History Documents - NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.4b.24. BROWSE TO LINK – BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Browse to Link”
Enabled only if Auction = Yes
User Actions
Click to open new browser window
System Response
Open new browser window
Once browser window is closed, copy history link into “Public Record Documents (Optional)” field
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 58 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
3/11/16 10:46 PM
R4 – Add/Update Section
Page 59 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
3.4.4c Listing > Rental Transaction Details
Figure 9 - Listing > Rental Transaction Details
ID 3.4.4c.1.
BREADCRUMBS – DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Field Header Text: “Listing > Rental Transaction Details”
Page enabled only if Type of Sale = Rental
Next button automatically displays if Type of Sale = Rental
Listing > Sale Transaction Details is disabled
User Actions
None
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 60 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
System Response
None
ID 3.4.4c.2.
DATE AVAILABLE – DATE WITH CALENDAR FIELD
Decription/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = Yes if Type of Sale = Rental
Field Header Text: “Date Available”
Standard Date with Calendar field – see Appendix A for details
User Action
Type date
-- or -Click calendar to select date
System Response
Display calendar
Set: General - Date Available
ID 3.4.4c.3.
SHORT TERM RENTAL TEMPLATE – NAV/LINK
Description/Notes
4.
5.
Nav/Link Text: “Go To The Quick Entry > Short Term Rental Template”
Enabled only if Type of Rental = Vacation Rental
User Action
Click to view Short Term Rental Template
System Response
Display Short Term Rental Template
ID 3.4.4c.4.
MINIMUM LEASE – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Mandatory Field = Yes if Type of Sale = Rental
Field Header Text: “Minimum Lease/Rental Terms”
Options:
1 Week
2 Weeks
Month-to-Month
1 Month
6 Month
1 Year
Location: Browser right of In $1,000’s
User Action
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set General - Minimum Lease
ID 3.4.4c.5.
MAXIMUM LEASE – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 61 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Mandatory Field = Yes if Type of Sale = Rental
Field Header Text: “Maximum Lease/Rental Terms”
Options:
Same as Minimum Lease
Location: Browser right of Minimum Lease
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set General - Maximum Lease
ID 3.4.4c.6.
LEASE CLAUSES – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
Field Header Text: “Lease Clauses”
Mandatory Field = No
Options:
Additional Storage Space
Carpet Cleaning
Case by Case
Deflea / Detick Clause
Diplomat / Military Only Transfer Clause
Drape Cleaning
Escalation Clause – New Descriptor
Exempt Rent Control
Listing Broker Application (if selected, can not select Listing Broker Lease)
Listing Broker Lease (if selected, can not select Listing Broker Application)
No Smoking – descriptor change
Owner Transfer
Pet Damage
Pets - Allowed
Pets - Not Allowed
Cats Only
Pet Size Restriction
Pet Allowed with Application/Deposit
Pets / Owner
Real Estate Tax Escalation Clause
Some Appliances / Equipment
Special Covenants
Tenant Transfer Clause
None
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set Rent Includes (Rental Property Only) - Lease Clauses
ID 3.4.4c.7.
PETS ALLOWED – RADIO BUTTON
Decription/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Pets Allowed? (Optional)
Standard Radio Button options – see Appendix A for details
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 62 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
4.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Suggestion: Mandatory if Property Type = Multi-Family
User Action
Click yes if pets are allowed
System Response
If Pets Allowed = Yes enable Pet Restriction Types
Set Listing - Pets Allowed? NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.4c.8.
PET RESTRICTION TYPES – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Note
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Pet Restriction Types”
Location: Browser right of Pet Allowed radio button
Options:
Allowed on Case by Case Basis – New Descriptor
Not Allowed - New Descriptor, if selected not allowed to make any other selection
Dogs Only - New Descriptor, if selected, can not select Cats Only
Cats Only - New Descriptor, if selected, can not select Dogs Only
Size Restriction – New Descriptor
Weight Restriction – New Descriptor
Large Pets Okay – New Descriptor
With Application/Deposit – New Descriptor
Limit of Number per Tenant/Owner– New Descriptor
Damage Deposit – New Descriptor
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Set Pet Restriction Types - NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.4c.9.
SMOKING – RADIO BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Smoking Allowed? (Optional)”
Standard Radio button options – see Appendix A for details
Suggestion: Mandatory if Property Type = Multi Family
Usr Action
Click yes if Smoking is allowed
System Response
Set Smoking Allowed NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.4c.10. SMOKING RESTRICTION TYPE – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Smoking Restriction Types”
Location: Browser right of Smoking Allowed radio button
Options:
Allowed in Unit – New Descriptor (if selected, can not select Not Allowed in Unit)
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 63 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
6.
7.
8.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Not Allowed in Unit – New Descriptor (if selected, can not select Allowed in Unit)
Allowed in Common Areas – New Descriptor (if selected, can not select Not Allowed in Common Areas)
Not Allowed in Common Areas – New Descriptor (if selected, can not select Allowed in Common Areas)
User Action
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set Smoking Restriction Types – NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.4c.11. RENT INCLUDES – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
Field Header Text: “Rent Includes”
Mandatory Field = No
Options:
Air Conditioning
Cable TV
Community Center
Common Area Maintenance
Electricity
Fiber Optics Available (if selected, can not select Fiber Optics at Dwelling)
Fiber Optics at Dwelling (if selected, can not select Fiber Optics Available)
Furnished
Gas
Grounds Maintenance
Heat
Homeowners Association Fee – Descriptor Change
Condominium/Coop Fee - New Descriptor
Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Maintenance (HVAC)
Insurance
Lawn Service
Lease Special Terms
Linens / Utensils
Maid Service
None
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set Rent Includes (Rental Property Only) - Rent Includes –
If Rent Includes = Homeowners Association / Condominium Fee Set Homeowners Association (radio button) = Yes and Disable
Homeowners Association Option Fees/Deposit Type Drop down box on Financial > Fees page.
If Rent Includes = Condominimum/Coop Fee Disable Condo/Coop Option Fees/Deposit Type Drop down box on Financial > Fees page
ID 3.4.4c.12. RENT SPECIALS – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Special Conditions”
Options:
Certified Funds Required
Fixed Increase
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 64 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
6.
7.
8.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Non-Management Rental
Property Rental
Subsidized Housing
User Action
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set: Special Conditions
ID 3.4.4c.13. TENANT RIGHTS – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Mandatory Field = ?
Field Header Text: “Tenant Rights”
Options:
Owner Occupied
1st Refusal
Tenant Group Formed
Tenant Notified
Original Tenant Exp
Vacant
None
User Action
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set Tenant Rights
ID 3.4.4c.14. TENANT RESPONSIBILITY – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Tenant Responsibilities”
Options:
All Utilities (if selected, can not select Some Utilities)
Common Area Maintenance
Fireplace / Flue Cleaning
Frozen Water Pipe Damage
Gutter Cleaning
Homeowners Association Fee Increase / Closing Costs Fee Increase
Homeowners Association / Condominium / Cooperative Fee
Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Maintenance (HVAC)
Insurance
Lawn/Tree/Shrub Care
Light Bulbs / Filters / Fuses / Alarm Care
Minor Exterior Maintenance
Minor Interior Maintenance
Some Appliances / Equipment
Some Utilities (if selected, can not select All Utilities)
Tax
Tennis / Pool Dues
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 65 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
21. Trash Removal Charge
22. Window/Screens
23. None
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Reponse
Expand drop down box
Set Tenant Responsible (Rental Property Only)
ID 3.4.4c.15. DISCLOSURES – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “Disclosures”
Options:
Agent Financial Interest
Agent Related to Owner
Build to Suit
Condition Pending Release
Conservation Area
Contract Purchaser
California Public Records Act - CPRA
Division potential
Encumbrances
Exception - disclose/disclaim
Flood Insurance - Required
Geo Hazard Zone
High Intensity Line
Historic Property
Infrastructure Fee Due at Settlement
Land Preservation Easement
Land Trust
Limited Service Brokerage
Maryland Department of Natural Resources
Mineral Lease
Mineral Resources Zone
Mineral Rights
Off-site Required
Other Known Environmental Hazards
Owner Real Estate License
Pipeline
Proffers
Property Disclaimer
Property Disclosure
Room Added without Permit
Sell Entirely
Sewer Debt Fee Not Retired
Subject to Agreement Conservation Easement
Subject to Condominium / Homeowners Association Documents
Subject to Department of Veterans Affair Power of Attorney
Subject to a Potential Short Sale
Surface Lease
Underground Storage Tank
Under Lease
Use and Occupancy Permit
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 66 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
44. Utility Retirement Fee Not Paid
45. Water Debt Fee Not Retired
46. Zoning Issues
47. Flood Zone
48. Lead Based Paint
49. None
50. Note: Old Keystone broke pet descriptors out by Homeowners Association/Rent and had different wording for each – this new
layout streamlines the choices and makes them available regardless of the property type or other choice.
51. Help Text: Training Department to provide
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set - Disclosures - Disclosures
ID 3.4.4c.16. DOCUMENTS – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
52.
53.
54.
55.
56.
57.
58.
59.
60.
61.
62.
63.
64.
65.
66.
67.
68.
69.
70.
71.
72.
73.
74.
75.
76.
77.
78.
79.
80.
81.
82.
83.
84.
85.
86.
87.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Documents (Optional)”
Options:
Aerial – New Descriptor
Appraisal
Boundary Line Survey
Certificate of Occupancy
Conditions
Construction Drawings
Covenants
Deed
Easements
Energy Star Certification
Environmental Testing
Homeowners Association / Condominium Documents in Broker Office
House Plans Available
Inspection Results Available
Investment Analysis
Leases
Plans Available
Plat
Public Works Agreement
Radon Test Results
Resale Package Available
Restrictions
Site Plan
Soil Ground Report
Survey - House Location
Survey - Stake
Survey -Tree
Third-Party Eco-friendly Certification
Water Agreement
Topographic Maps
Well Report
Feasibility Study
Timber Cruise
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 67 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
User Action
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set Documents - Documents
ID 3.4.4c.17. UPLOAD DOCUMENTS – BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
Mandatory Field = No
User Action
Click to open light box to upload documents
System Response
Open DocCentral in light box
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 68 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
3/11/16 10:46 PM
R4 – Add/Update Section
Page 69 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
3.4.4d Listing > Remarks
Figure 10 - Listing > Remarks Page
Listing Tab – Remarks Vision Statement:
The Remarks sub heading provides provides the most flexible set of fields in the application. While the renovation is focused on getting
more and better details in the standardized forms portion of the application, the Agent Remarks are where the agent uses his/her
marketing pizazz. The number of available characters needs to be tripled (from 400 to 1,200 characters). The ability to spell check, track
character usage and copy (auto) from Internet to General is also included in the new requirements.
User Stories:
User wishes to provide marketing details (outside of fixed field choices) to better merchandize the property. To be continued…
Acceptance Criteria:
….
ID 3.4.4d.1.
BREADCRUMBS – DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
Field Header Text: “Listing > Remarks”
User Action
None
System Response
None
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 70 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
ID 3.4.4d.2.
R4 – Add/Update Section
INTERNET REMARK - DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Text: “These remarks are Public and will be viewed on the Internet.”
Help Text: Training Department to provide
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.4d.3.
ADD/EDIT INTERNET REMARKS – LONG TEXT FIELD
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Tab Key Index: N/A
Text: ”Add/Edit an Internet Remark”
Maximum Characters = 1200
User Actions
Type Internet Remarks
System Response
Set Remarks - Internet
ID 3.4.4d.4.
ADMIN OPTIONS – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Mandatory Field = No
Options:
Admin Options
Save as Custom Template
Select Save Template
Location: Browser right of Internet Remark Display Text
User Action
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
If “Save as Custom Template” is selected: Open message box to name Custom Template and save name with Save and cancel button
Save as Custom Template saves ALL content in ALL Long Text boxes.
If “Select Saved Custom Template “is selected: Open message box with a drop down box of named custom templates and a “Open” and
cancel button
ID 3.4.4d.5.
INTERNET REMARKS CHARACTER COUNTER – ACTIVE DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Mandatory Field = No
Text: (typed characters count/1200)
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 71 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
User Action
None
System Response
Count Characters when user reaches maximum characters, character counter text turns red and “Save and Continue” and “Previous”
buttons disable
ID 3.4.4d.6.
CHECK SPELLING - NAV/LINK
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Spell Check”
User Action
Click to open Spell Check in new window
System Response
MRIS compliant Spelling engine opens in new window and runs spell checker
ID 3.4.4d.7.
THESAURUS – NAV/LINK
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Thesaurus”
User Action
Click link to find suggestions in Long Text content
System Response
Open thesaurus in new window
ID 3.4.4d.8.
COPY TO GENERAL REMARKS CHECK BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Index: “Copy to General Remarks”
User Action
Click check box to copy Internet Remarks to General Remarks text box
System Response
Copy Internet Remarks to General Remarks
Set - Listing Remarks General
ID 3.4.4d.9.
COPY TO FARM REMARKS CHECK BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Index: “Copy to Farm Remarks”
Only enabled if Farm = Yes
Help Tips: Training Department to provide. Suggestion: explain why this is disabled, provide link to Lot/Land > Farm Essentials
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 72 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
User Action
Click check box to copy Internet Remarks to Farm Remarks text box
System Response
Copy Internet Remarks to Farm Remarks
Set - Listing Remarks Farm
ID 3.4.4d.10. GENERAL REMARKS - DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Mandatory Field = No
Text: “These remarks are for other Agents only and are not seen by the Consumer on the Internet.”
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.4d.11. ADD/EDIT GENERAL REMARKS – LONG TEXT FIELD
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Text: “Add/Edit a General Remark”
Same functionality as 3.4.4c.3
Help Text: Training Department to provide
User Action
Type General Remarks
System Response
Display content only to MRIS Matrix users only, not for consumer view
See existing business rules
Set – Listing Remarks General
ID 3.4.4d.12. GENERAL REMARKS CHARACTER COUNTER – ACTIVE DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
Same functionality as Character Counter (see 3.4.4c.5 for details)
User Action
Same as 3.4.4c.4.
System Response
Same as 3.4.4c.4.
ID 3.4.4d.13. GENERAL REMARKS CHECK SPELLING AND THESAURUS – NAV/LINK
Description/Notes
1.
Same functionality as Check Spelling and Thesaurus Nav/Link (see 3.4.4c6 & 7 for details)
User Action
Same as 3.4.4c.5.
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 73 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
System Response
Same as 3.4.4c.5.
ID 3.4.4d.14. FARM REMARKS – DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Text: “These remarks are for Farm properties only.”
Only enabled if Farm = “Yes”
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.4d.15. FARM – RADIO BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Farm?”
Standard Radio button options – See Appdenix A for details
User Action
Click yes if property is a Farm, and enable Farm Remarks
Sysrem Response
Enable Farm Remarks and the following fields on Lot/Land > Farm Essentials:
Farm Operation
Present Livestock
Number of Tenant Dwellings
Number of Silos
Total Silo Size
Main Barn Size
Tillable Acreage
Pasture Acreage
Marsh Acreage
Agricultural District
Best Use
Potential Livestock
Set Farm = Yes
ID 3.4.4d.16. ADD/EDIT FARM REMARKS – LONG TEXT FIELD
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Mandatory Field = Yes, if Farm = Yes
Text: “Add/Edit a Farm Remark”
Only enabled if Farm = “Yes”
Help Tips: Training Department to provide. Suggestion: explain why this is disabled, provide link to Lot/Land > Farm Essentials
Same functionality as Add/Edit Internet Remarks (see 3.4.4c.3 for details)
User Action
Same functionality as 3.4.4c.1 and 3.4.4c.8
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 74 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
System Response
Set Listing – Remarks – Farm
ID 3.4.4d.17. FARM REMARKS CHARACTER COUNTER – ACTIVE DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
Same functionality as Character Counter (see 3.4.4c.5 for details)
User Action
Same as 3.4.4c.4.
System Response
Same as 3.4.4c.4.
ID 3.4.4d.18. FARM REMARKS CHECK SPELLING AND THESAURUS – NAV/LINK
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Enabled only if Farm = Yes
Help Tips: Training Department to provide. Suggestion: explain why this is disabled, provide link to Lot/Land > Farm Essentials
Same functionality as Check Spelling and Thesaurus Nav/Link (see 3.4.4c6 & 7 for details)
User Action
Same as 3.4.4c.5.
System Response
Same as 3.4.4c.5.
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 75 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
3.4.4e Listing > Contacts
Figure 11 - Listing > Contact Info Page
Listing Tab – Contact Info Vision Statement:
The Contact Info sub heading is a new, all encompassing form to capture Agent of Record, back-up agent, and seller info. Several new
fields have been introduced to clean up the process including “Primary (Email/Phone)” and “Secondary (Email/Phone)”. Another new
field aims to direct the reader to the “Best Method” to contact.
Note: it is anticipated that the “Preferences” section and requirements will have been identified or built before this goes to development.
The Agent preferences should feed into this page where applicable.
Also, the “Seller” contact info may not be in the User’s CRM database – a flow from here to the CRM would be a benefit. Alternately, an
import feature may be feasible to reduce keystrokes if the customer info was already captured elsewhere.
User Story
Acceptance Criteria
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 76 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
ID 3.4.4e.1.
R4 – Add/Update Section
BREADCRUMBS – DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
Field Header Text: “Listing > Contact Info”
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.4e.2.
LISTING AGENT – NAV/LINK
Description/Notes
1. Mandatory Field = No
2. Field Header Text Line 1 when collapsed (default): “+ Listing Agent:” Agent logged in or selected Listing Agent set in user
preferences, display First and Last Name “, Change”
3. Field Header Text when expanded: “- Listing Agent:” Agent logged in or selected Listing Agent set in user preferences, display
First and Last Name “, Change”
User Actions
Click to display Listing Agent fields
System Response
Display the following fields:
“Listing Agent Name”
“Find Agent”
“Real PIng ID”
“Sign Up”
“User Preferences”
ID 3.4.4e.2a. LISTING AGENT NAME – FREE FORM TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Field Header Text: “Listing Agent”
Mandatory Field = Yes
Standard Name Field – see Appendix A for details
Auto-fill with logged in Agent or user preferences if set
Overwrite capability
User Actions
Type to overwrite auto-fill
System Response
Identify Agent Name with ID#
Set - Participants - Agent ID#
ID 3.4.4e.2b. FIND AGENT – BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Not You?”
Location: Browser right of Listing Agent Name
Button Text: “Find Agent”
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 77 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
User Action
Click to open Find Agent Wizard
System Response
Open Find Agent Wizard in light box
Once User selects Agent, auto-fill Agent First and Last Name in “Name” field
Set Agent of Record with selected Agent First, Last Name and Agent ID
ID 3.4.4e.2c. REAL PING ID – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Real Ping ID (Optional)”
If set up with Real Ping, auto-fill with logged in Agent, or Agent set
Overwrite capability
User Actions
Type Real Ping ID #
System Response
Set - Listing Contacts Real Ping ID
ID 3.4.4e.2d. SIGN UP – BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Not Signed Up?”
Location: Browser right of Real Ping ID
Button Text: “Sign Up”
User Actions
Click to open MRIS RealPing info web page in light box to sign up for Real Ping
System Response
Open Partner website in light box
If user signs up for Real Ping, auto-fill “Real Ping ID” field with ID #
ID 3.4.4e.2e. MORE INFO – NAV/LINK
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “More Info”
Location: Browser right of Sign Up button
User Actions
Click link to view MRIS RealPing’s more information
System Response
Open http://mris.com/mris-products/premium-products/realping/ in new browser window
ID 3.4.4e.2f. UPDATE PREFERENCES - BUTTON
Description/Notes
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 78 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
1.
2.
3.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Mandatory Field = No
Button Text: “Update Preferences”
Standard User Preference Button – see Appendix A for details
User Actions
Click to update User Preferences
System Response
Save changes to User Preferences
ID 3.4.4e.3. ALTERNATE AGENT INFO – NAV/LINK
Description/Notes
1. Mandatory Field = No
2. Field Header Title when collapsed (default): “+ Alternate Agent Info: “ Alternate Agent First Name + Alternate Agent Last Name
if set “, Change” - if Alternate Agent is not set, then only display “+ Alternate Agent Info: Set”
3. Field Header Title when expanded: “- Alternate Info: “ Alternate Agent First Name + Alternate Last Name, if set “, Change” - if
Alternate Agent is not set, then only display “- Alternate Agent Info: Set”
User Action
Click to update Alternate Agent Info
System Response
Display the following fields:
Set Agent Name
Alternate Agent Name
Find Agent
Primary Phone
Secondary Phone
Primary Email
Secondary Email
Preferred Method of Contact
Showing Contact
Update Preferences
Add Another Contact
Once Alternate Agent Name is set, display in Alternate Agent Info – Nav Link
ID 3.4.4e.3a. SET ALTERNATE AGENT NAME – DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Display Text: Alternate Agent Name
If Alternate Agent Name is not set, then display = null
User Actions
Click to delete Alternate Agent Name
System Response
Clear Participants - Alternate Agent Name
ID 3.4.4e.3b. ALTERNATE AGENT NAME – TEXT FIELD
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Alternate Agent Name”
Standard Name Field – see Appendix for details
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 79 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
4.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Auto-fill if user preferences set with over write capability
User Actions
Type phone number
System Response
Set Participants - Alternate Agent Name
ID 3.4.4e.3c. FIND AGENT – BUTTON
Description/Notes
5.
6.
7.
Mandatory Field = No
Location: Browser right of Alternate Agent Name
Button Text: “Find Agent”
User Action
Click to open Find Agent Wizard
System Response
Open Find Agent Wizard in light box
Once User selects Agent, auto-fill Agent First and Last Name in “Name” field
Set Agent of Record with selected Agent First, Last Name and Agent ID
ID 3.4.4e.3d. ALTERNATE AGENT PRIMARY PHONE – NUMBER FIELD
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = Yes, if Alternate Agent Name is set
Field Header Text: “Primary Phone”
Auto-fill if user preferences set with over write capability
Standard Phone Field – see Appendix A for details
User Actions
Type phone number
System Response
Set Alternate Agent Office Phone
ID 3.4.4e.3e. ALTERNATE AGENT SECONDARY PHONE – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Secondary Phone (Optional)”
Auto-fill if user preferences set with overwrite capability
Standard Phone character format – see Appendix A for details
User Actions
Type phone number
System Response
Set Alternate Agent Home Phone
ID 3.4.4e.3f. ALTERNATE AGENT PRIMARY EMAIL – EMAIL TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
Mandatory Field = Yes, if Alternate Agent Name is set
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 80 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
2.
3.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Field Header Text: “Primary Email”
Auto-fill if user preferences are set with Over write capability
User Actions
Type email address
System Response
Set NEW FIELD Agent Primary Email
Check for valid email address format (name@domain.com)
ID 3.4.4e.3g. ALTERNATE AGENT SECONDARY EMAIL – EMAIL TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Secondary Email (Optional)”
Auto-fill if user preferences are set with Over write capability
User Actions
Type email address
System Response
Set NEW FIELD Agent Secondary Email
Check for valid email address format (name@domain.com)
ID 3.4.4e.3h. ALTERNATE AGENT PREFFERED METHOD CONTACT – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Mandatory Field = Yes, if Alternate Agent Name is set
Field Header Text: “Preferred Method of Contact”
Options:
Primary Email – New Descriptors
Secondary Email – New Descriptors
Primary Phone – New Descriptors
Seconary Phone – New Descriptors
Text Primary Phone – New Descriptors
Text Secondary Phone – New Descriptors
User Action
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set –Alternate Agent Preferred Method of Contact NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.4e.3i.
SHOWING CONTACT – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Showing Contact”
Options:
Primary Contact
Secondary Contact
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 81 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
User Action
Click to expand drop down box to set Showing Contact
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set Participants - Showing Contact First Name and Participants - Showing Contact Last Name
Auto-fill Showing Contact fields on Promotions > Showing Details page
If both Primary and Secondary Contact have been selected, open new light box displaying selected Showing contacts
ID 3.4.4e.3j.
UPDATE PREFERENCES – BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Button Text: “Update Preferences”
Standard User Preference button – see Appendix A for details
User Actions
Click to update preferences
System Response
Update user preferences
ID 3.4.4e.3k. ADD ANOTHER ALTERNATE AGENT – NAV/LINK
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Add Another Alternate Agent”
User Actions
Click to add another Alternate Agent
System Response
Save current information in Alternate Agent form
Add current Alternate Agent Name to Set Alternate Agent Name display text
Clear form
ID 3.4.4e.4.
OWNER INFO – NAV/LINK
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text when expanded: “- Owner Info” (default)
Field Header Text when collapsed: “+ Owner Info”
System should have capability to export Owner Info to CRM application
User Actions
Click to display Owner Info fields
System Response
Display the following fields (default):
“Owner #1 Name”
“Privacy Text”
“Primary Phone”
”Primary Email”
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 82 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
“Secondary Phone”
“Secondary Phone”
“Secondary Email”
“Preferred Method of Contact”
“Owner #2 Name”
“Primary Phone”
“Primary Email”
“Secondary Phone”
“Secondary Email”
“Preferred Method of Contact”
“Showing Contact”
“Export to CRM”
ID 3.4.4e.5.
PRIVACY TEXT – DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = No
Line 1 Text: “This information is”
Line 2 Text: “for your use only”
Location: Browser right of Owner Info Nav/Link
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.4e.6.
OWNER #1 NAME – FREE FORM TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Column 1
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “Owner #1 Name”
Auto-fill from tax records with Over write capability
Standard Name Field – see Appendix A for details
Help Text: Training Department to provide. Suggest include note that owner information will not be shared.
User Actions
Type owner’s first name then last name
System Response
Set - Owner Owner First Name and Owner Last Name
ID 3.4.4e.7.
PRIMARY PHONE – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Column 1
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “Primary Phone”
Auto-fill from tax records with Over write capability
Standard Phone character format – see Appendix A for details
User Actions
Type phone number
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 83 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
System Response
Set - Owner Home Phone
ID 3.4.4e.8.
SECONDARY PHONE – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Column 1
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Secondary Phone”
Standard Phone character format – see Appendix A for details
User Actions
Type phone number
System Response
Set - Owner Owner Office Phone
ID 3.4.4e.9.
PRIMARY EMAIL – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Column 1
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “Primary email”
User Actions
Type email address
System Response
Set - Owner Owner Primary Email - NEW FIELD
Check for valid email address format (name@domain.com)
ID 3.4.4e.10. SECONDARY EMAIL – EMAIL TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Column 1
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Secondary email”
User Actions
Type email address
System Response
Set - Owner Owner Secondary Email - NEW FIELD
Check for valid email address format (name@domain.com)
ID 3.4.4e.11. PREFERRED METHOD OF CONTACT – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Column 1
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “Preferred Method of Contact”
Options:
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 84 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
5.
6.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Same functionality as Preferred Method of Contact in Alternate Agent section
Help Text: “Choose the best way and type to reach the recipient.”
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set – Owner Preferred Contact Method - NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.4e.12. SHOWING CONTACT – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Showing Contact”
Options:
Primary Contact
Secondary Contact
User Action
Click to expand drop down box to set Showing Contact
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set Participants - Showing Contact First Name and Participants - Showing Contact Last Name
Auto-fill Showing Contact fields on Promotions > Showing Details page
If both Primary and Secondary Contact have been selected, open new light box displaying selected Showing contacts
ID 3.4.4e.13. EXPORT TO CRM – BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Button Text: “Export to CRM”
More research and discussion is needed to determine the amount of integration with an existing or new customer database.
User Action
Click to Export owner info to CRM
System Response
Opens CRM in light box
ID 3.4.4e.14. COPY PRIMARY CONTACT – CHECK BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Copy Primary Contact Info”
Location: Browser right of Owner #1 Name
User Action
Click to copy primary contact info
System Response
Copy following field info to Owner #2 fields in Column 2:
Last Name
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 85 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Primary Phone
Primary Emai
ID 3.4.4e.15. OWNER #2 NAME – FREE FORM TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Column 2
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Owner #2 Name”
Auto-fill from tax records with Over write capability
Standard Name Field – see Appendix A for details
Suggesting new combined field (full first and last) – this is not noted as a new field in the taxonomy.
User Actions
Type owner’s first and last name
System Response
Set - Owner Owner #2 First Name and Owner Owner #2 Last Name
ID 3.4.4e.16. PRIMARY PHONE – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Column 2
Mandatory Field = Yes if Owner #2 is set
Standard Phone Field – see Appendix A for details
Auto-fill from Owner #1 Primary Phone if Copy Primary Contact is checked
User Action
Type primary phone if different than Owner #1
System Response
Set - Owner Owner #2 Home Phone
ID 3.4.4e.17. SECONDARY PHONE – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Column 2
Mandatory Field = No
Same functionality as Owner #1 Secondary Phone
User Action
Type Owner #2 Secondary Phone
System Response
Set - Owner - Owner #2 Office Phone
ID 3.4.4e.18. PRIMARY EMAIL – EMAIL TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Column 2
Mandatory Field = Yes, if Owner #2 is set
Same functionality as Owner #1 Primary Email
Auto-fill from Owner #1 Primary Email if Copy Primary Contact is checked
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 86 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
User Action
Type Owner #2 Primary Email, if different than Owner #1 Primary Email
System Response
Set - Owner Owner #2 Primary Email – NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.4e.19. SECONDARY EMAIL – EMAIL TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Column 2
Mandatory Field = No
Same functionality as Owner #1 Secondary Email
User Action
Type Owner #2 Secondary Email
System Response
Set - Owner- Owner #2 Secondary Email - NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.4e.20. PREFERRED METHOD OF CONTACT – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Column 2
Same functionality as Alternate Agent Preferred Method of Contact
User Action
Click to expand drop down box
Select Owner #2 Preferred Method of Contact
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set - Owner #2 Preferred Contact Method - NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.4e.21. SHOWING CONTACT – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Column 2
Mandatory Field = No
Same functionality as Alternate Agent Showing Contact
User Action
Click to expand drop down box to select Owner #2 as a Showing Contact
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set Participants - Showing Contact First Name and Participants - Showing Contact Last Name
Auto-fill Showing Contact fields on Promotions > Showing Details page
If both Primary and Secondary Contact have been selected, open new light box displaying selected Showing contacts
ID 3.4.4e.22. PROPERTY MANAGEMENT– RADIO BUTTON
Description/Notes
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 87 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
1.
2.
3.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Mandatory Field = No
Standard radio button options – See Appendix A for details
Default Yes if Type of Ownership = Condo, Coop or Rental Apartment
User Action
Click if Property Management Company is or is not involved
System Response
If Property Management = Yes Display the following fields:
“Contact Name”
“Company Name"
“Company Website”
“Primary Phone”
“Primary Email”
“Secondary Phone”
“Secondary Email”
“Preferred Method of Contact”
“Showing Contact”
ID 3.4.4e.23. PROPERTY MANAGEMENT INFO – NAV/LINK
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text when expanded: “- Property Management Info”
Field Header Text when collapsed: “+ Property Management Info” (default)
User Action
Click to display Property Management fields
System Response
Display the following fields:
“Contact Name”
“Company Name"
“Primary Phone”
“Primary Email”
“Secondary Phone”
“Secondary Email”
“Preferred Method of Contact”
“Showing Contact”
ID 3.4.4e.24. COMPANY NAME – FREE FORM TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = Yes, if Property Management = Yes
Field Header Text: “Company Name”
Character Format: xxxxx
User Action
Type company name
System Response
Set - Participants - Property Management - Property Manager's Company Name
ID 3.4.4e.25. COMPANY WEBSITE – TEXT BOX
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 88 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Field HeaderText: “Company Website”
Location: Browser right of Company Name
User Actions
Type Property Management website url, if exists
System Response
Set Property Mgt URL – NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.4e.26. LOOK IT UP – BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Button Text: “Look It Up”
Location: Browser right of Company Website
User Actions
Click to
System Response
Open new window, when new window is closed, copy url into Company Website field
ID 3.4.4e.27. CONTACT NAME – FREE FORM TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Contact Name”
Standard Name Field – see Appendix A for details
User Action
Type contact name
System Response
Set - Participants - Property Management - Property Manager's First Name and Property Management - Property Manager's Last Name
ID 3.4.4e.28. PRIMARY PHONE – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = Yes if Property Management = Yes
Field Header Text: “Primary Phone”
Auto-fill from tax records with Over write capability
Standard Phone Field – see Appendix A for details
User Action
Type phone number
System Response
Set - Participants - Property Management - Management Company Phone Number
ID 3.4.4e.29. SECONDARY PHONE – NUMBER FIELD
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 89 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Secondary Phone”
Standard Phone Field – see Appendix A for details
User Action
Type phone number
System Response
Set - Participants - Property Management - Management Company Alternate Phone
ID 3.4.4e.30. PRIMARY EMAIL – EMAIL TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Mandatory Field = Yes, if Property Management = Yes
Field Header Text: “Primary email”
User Action
Type email address
System Response
Set NEW FIELD Property Manager Primary Email
Check for valid email address format (name@domain.com)
ID 3.4.4e.31. SECONDARY EMAIL – EMAIL TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Secondary email (Optional)”
Character format: name@domain.com(net, org, etc)
User Action
Type email address
System Response
Set NEW FIELD Property Manager Secondary Email
Check for valid email address format (name@domain.com)
ID 3.4.4e.32. FAX NUMBER – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Fax Number (Optional)”
Standard Phone Field – see Appendix A for details
User Action
Type fax number
System Response
Set - Participants - Management Company Fax Number
ID 3.4.4e.33. PREFERRED METHOD OF CONTACT – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 90 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Same functionality as Alternative Agent Preferred Method of Contact
Options:
Email – New Descriptor
Phone – New Descriptor
Text Primary Phone – New Descriptor
Text Secondary Phone – New Descriptor
Fax Number – New Descriptor
User Action
Same functionality as Alternative Agent Preferred Method of Contact
System Response
Set - Property Manager Preferred Contact Method- NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.4e.34. SHOWING CONTACT – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Column 2
Mandatory Field = No
Same functionality as Alternate Agent Showing Contact
User Action
Click to expand drop down box to select Owner #2 as a Showing Contact
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set Participants - Showing Contact First Name and Participants - Showing Contact Last Name
Auto-fill Showing Contact fields on Promotions > Showing Details page
If both Primary and Secondary Contact have been selected, open new light box displaying selected Showing contacts
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 91 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
3/11/16 10:46 PM
R4 – Add/Update Section
Page 92 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
3.4.5a Promotions > Media
Figure 12 - Marketing > Media Page (With Media Connect Open)
Promotion Tab Vision Statement:
The Promotion tab focuses the User’s attention on fields and descriptors aimed and telling “the world” about the property. Media
Connect is now called out by name and placed in a more prominent section. Sections aimed at open houses, showings, and creating
marketing materials are highlighted in this section too. The User should be able to start and complete the details necessary to
merchandise a property. Note: there are plans to call out several of these tools upon submission to the MLS (“Things you might want to
do next” that would direct the user to Showing Assist, the marketing center (Imprev), or open houses information) as some 3 rd Party
providers cannot move forward until an MLS# is issued (or rely on RETS feeds to initiate their service.
User Story:
Acceptance Criteria:
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 93 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
ID 3.4.5a.1.
R4 – Add/Update Section
BREADCRUMBS – DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
Field Header Text: “Promotions > Media”
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.5a.2.
PHOTO OPTIONS – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “Photo Options”
Options:
Lister Will Upload
No Photo Per Seller
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set Photo Options Photo Option
ID 3.4.5a.3.
MEDIA CONNECT - BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Mandatory Field = No
Button Text: “Open Media Connect”
User Actions
Click to open Media Connect to upload photos in same window
System Response
Add new field to Media Connect: include room details if Category or Caption = Room Name
ID 3.4.5a.4.
VIEW VIDEO – NAV/LINK
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “View Video” (count)
(count) = number of videos
Display link for all available videos
If no videos available then
Display Line 1: “No videos available at this time.”
Display Line 2: “Please upload your photos in Media Connect to create a video.”
User Actions
Click to view video
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 94 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
System Response
Link opens video in light box
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 95 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
3.4.5b Promotions > Documents
Figure 13 - Promotions > Documents Page
ID 3.4.5b.1.
BREADCRUMBS – DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
Field Header Text: “ Promotions > Documents”
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.5b.2.
3/11/16 10:46 PM
DOCUMENT REMINDER – DISPLAY TEXT
Page 96 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Field Header Text: “Suggested Documents to Upload”
Display Disclosures and Documents Set on Listing > Transaction Details
User Actions
Nones
System Response
None
ID 3.4.5b.3.
TYPE OF DOCUMENT – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Type of Document”
Upload documents to Listing folder unless otherwise noted
Options:
Additional Ernest Money Received – (Lending Folder)
Agency Disclosure
All Documents
Brochure
Broker Demand
Buyer's Agreement
Buyer's Inspection Waiver
CC & R's
Closing Instructions
Counter Offer
Deed of Trust – (Lending Folder)
Disclosures / Disclaimers
Environmental Disclosure Report
Ernest Money Deposit
FIRPTA
Flood Zone Certification
Homeowners Association Documents
Home Inspection Report
Home Warranty
HUD 1 – (Lending Folder)
Lead Based Paint Disclosure
Listing Agreement
Mold Disclosure
Natural Hazard Disclosure
Payoff Demand - Lending
Pest Control Report
Pool Inspection
Power of Attorney
Quit Claim Deed
Reconveyance
Residential Purchase Agreement
Roof Inspection
Seller's Additional Disclosures
Seller's Statement on Repairs
Septic / Sewer Disclosure
Smoke Detector Disclosure
Statement of Information for Buyer
Statement of Information for Seller
Transfer Disclosure Statement
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 97 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
44. Water Heater Statement
User Actions
Click to type document to upload
System Response
Enable Upload Button, Set Folder in Doc Central
ID 3.4.5b.4.
UPLOAD DOCUMENTS - BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Mandatory Field = No
Button Text: “Upload”
User Actions
Click to upload document to DocCentral to appropriate folder
DocCentral Opens in new window
System Response
DocCentral opens in new window with appropriate folder open
When window is closed, uploaded document displays below with Uploaded Documents
ID 3.4.5b.5.
UPLOADED DOCUMENTS – NAV/LINK
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Uploaded Documents”
Display Title of all uploaded documents
User Actions
Click to view uploaded document
System Response
Nav/link views uploaded document in appropriate folder
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 98 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
3.4.5c Promotions > Showing Details
Figure 14 - Promotions > Showing Instructions Page
Promotion Showing Information Vision Statement:
The Showing Time screen provides two different fucntions for the user. 1. A basic set of fields to serve a listing with details on showing
instructions. 2. A base set of field details that are ported to Showing Assist (where the User can access tools and services to streamline
the process and provide greater detail. Note: the current implementation for Showing Assist requires an MLS# and details to be supplied
via a RETS feed. The limitation means the User will only put part of the information in during Input and then need to complete the details
on Showing Assist hosted pages after submitting to the MLS.
User Stories:
The User wishes…
Acceptance Crieria:
Insert Here…
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 99 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
ID 3.4.5c.1.
R4 – Add/Update Section
BREADCRUMBS – DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
Field Header Text: “Promotions > Showing Details”
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.5c.2.
SHOWING ASSIST – RADIO BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Manage Showings Online? (Optional)”
Standard Radio button options see Appendix A
Help Text: Training will provide – need to spell out benefits of using Showing Assist (no cost)
User Actions
Click yes to use Showing Assist
System Response
If “Yes” is selected enable Sign Up button – remain until changed
If No is selected enable Log In button – remain until changed
ID 3.4.5c.3.
SIGN UP/LOG IN - BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = No
Button Text: “Sign Up” if Showing Assist Radio button = Yes
Button Text: “Log In” if Showing Assist Radio button = No
Future Development
User Actions
Click to open Showing Assist in new window
System Response
If logged in Agent is signed up with ShowingAssist Button text = “Log In”
ID 3.4.5c.4.
APPOINTMENT TYPE – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Appointment Type (Optional)”
Options:
Appointment Required
Courtesy Call
No Appointment Required (Go & Show)
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 100 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set Appointment Type NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.5c.5.
ADVANCED NOTICE – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Advanced Notice (Optional)
Options:
Required
Preferred
No Requirement
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
If selected, enable Hours for Advanced Notice
Set Advanced Notice NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.5c.6.
HOURS FOR ADVANCED NOTICE – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Hours for Advanced Notice (Optional)”
Enabled only if Advanced Notice is selected
Options:
1
2
4
8
12
24
48
Location: Browser right of Advanced Notice
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set Hours for Advanced Notice NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.5c.7.
ENTRY INFO – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1. Mandatory Field: Yes
2. Field Header Text: “Entry Info”
3. Options:
4. Gate/Entrance Central
5. Key at Desk (if selected, can not select Ket at Broker Office)
6. Key at Broker Office (if selected, can not select Ket at Desk)
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 101 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
7. Listing Agent Must Accompany
8. Lockbox – Combo (if selected, can not select Lockbox – Electronic, Lockbox – Front Door, Lockbox – None, Lockbox – Sentrilock,
or Lockbox – Supra)
9. Lockbox – Electronic (if selected, can not select Lockbox – Combo, Lockbox – Front Door, Lockbox – None, Lockbox – Sentrilock,
or Lockbox – Supra)
10. Lockbox - Front Door (if selected, can not select Lockbox – Comb, Lockbox – Electronic, Lockbox – None, Lockbox – Sentrilock, or
Lockbox – Supra)
11. Lockbox – None (if selected, can not select Lockbox – Combo, Lockbox – Electronic, Lockbox – Front Door, Lockbox – Sentrilock
or Lockbox – Supra)
12. Lockbox – Sentrilock (if selected, can not select Lockbox – Combo, Lockbox – Electronic, Lockbox – Front Door, Lockbox – None,
or Lockbox – Supra)
13. Lockbox – Supra (if selected, can not select Lockbox – Combo, Lockbox – Electronic, Lockbox – Front Door, Lockbox – None, or
Lockbox – Sentrilock)
14. Manager/Receptionist Desk
15. Owner will Provide Access – New Descriptor
16. No Boundary Mark
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set: Listing – Showing Instructions
ID 3.4.5c.8.
OCCUPANCY – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Occupancy Details (Options)”
Options:
Owner Occupied
Tenant Occupied
Vacant
User Action
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set Occupancy Details – NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.5c.9.
SHOWING INSTRUCTIONS – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1. Mandatory Field = Yes
2. Field Header Text: “Showing Instructions”
3. Options:
4. Alarm Code – Descriptor Change, was Call 1st – Alarm Code
5. Call 1st - Listing Agent Office (if selected, can not select Call 1st – Showing Contact, Call 1st – Showing Service, Call 1st - Listing
Agent or Call 1st – Owner)
6. Call 1st - Showing Contact (if selected, can not select Call 1st – Listing Agent Office, Call 1st – Showing Service, Call 1st - Listing
Agent or Call 1st – Owner)
7. Call 1st - Showing Service (if selected, can not select Call 1st – Listing Agent Office, Call 1st – Showing Contact, Call 1st - Listing
Agent or Call 1st – Owner)
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 102 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
8. Call 1st – Listing Agent – Descriptor Change, was Call 1st – Lister Agent (if selected, can not select Call 1st – Listing Agent Office,
Call 1st – Showing Contact, Call 1st – Showing Service, or Call 1st – Owner)
9. Call 1st – Owner (if selected, can not select Call 1st – Listing Agent Office, Call 1st – Showing Contact, or Call 1st – Showing
Service)
10. Owner Restrictions Requested – New Descriptor
11. Email 1st – Listing Agent – Descriptor Change, was Email 1st – Lister Agent
12. No Phone
13. No Sign on Property (if selected, can not select Sign on Property)
14. Sign on Property (if selected, can not select No Sign on Property)
15. Off Site Sales (if selected, can not select On Site Sales)
16. On Site Sales (if selected, can not select Off Site Sales)
17. Pet on Property – Descriptor Change, was Call 1st - Pet
18. Plan Available / No Model
19. See Models
20. Help Tips: Training Department to Provide. Suggest: Appointment Type and Hours for Advanced Notice are in separate fields. If
any Call 1st options are selected, offer link to add link to Listing > Contact Info.
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Add to Listing – Showing Instructions
ID 3.4.5c.10. DAYS – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Days Available (Optional)”
Options:
All Days
Sunday
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set: Days
ID 3.4.5c.11. OPEN TIMES – TIME MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Open Times (Optional)”
Standard Time Options – see Appendix A for details
New Descriptors
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 103 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set Show Times Open
ID 3.4.5c.12. AM/PM – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “AM/PM (Optional)”
Standard AM/PM Options – see Appendix A for details
New Descriptors
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Add to Show Times Open
ID 3.4.5c.13. CLOSE TIMES – TIME MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Close Times (Optional)”
Standard Time Options – see Appendix A for details
New Descriptors
Location: Browser right of AM/PM
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set Show Times Closed
ID 3.4.5c.14. AM/PM – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “AM/PM (Optional)”
Standard AM/PM Options – see Appendix A for details
New Descriptors
Location: Browser right of Close Times
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Add to Show Times Closed
ID 3.4.5c.15. UPDATE PREFERENCES – BUTTON
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 104 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Buton Text: “Update Preferences”
Enabled only if User Preferences have been changed or if no Preferences have not been set
User Actions
Click to set new changes to User Preferences
System Response
Update current settings to User Preferences for Showing Instrusctions
ID 3.4.5c.16. SHOWING REMARKS – LONG TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Showing Remarks (Optional)”
Includes the following:
Character counter
Spell Check
Thesaurus
User Actions
Type showing remarks
System Response
Set Showing Remarks – NEW FIELD ?
ID 3.4.5c.17. CONTACT OPTIONS – NAV/LINK
Description/Notes
1. Field Header Text (default): “- Advanced Options”
2. System should “remember” user’s selection. For example, if user selects to hide Contact Options, Contact Options should
remain hidden until user changes selection.
User Actions
Click to hide Contact Options
System Response
Hide the following fields:
Send Requests to Showing Contact 1
Contacy By
Email Address
Phone
No Response
Send Requests to Showing Contact 2
Contact By
Email Address
Phone
ID 3.4.5c.18. SEND REQUESTS – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
Mandatory Field = No
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 105 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
1. Field Header Text: “Send Requests to Showing Contacts(Optional)”
2. Options:
3. Alternate Agent 1 – new descriptor
4. Alternate Agent 2 – new descriptor
5. Owner #1
6. Owner #2
7. Property Management – new descriptor
8. New Contact
9. Auto-filled from selections made on Listing > Contact Showing Contact drop down box. For example: If on Listing > Contact Info
page, in the Showing Contact drop down field the Alternate Agent 1 is set as the Primary Contact, and Owner #2 is set as the
Secondary Contact. Then in this field Alternate Agent 1 and Owner #2 would be automatically selected.
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set Send Requests to NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.5c.19. CONTACT BY – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1. Mandatory Field = No
2. Field Header Text: “Contact By”
3. Enabled only if Send Requests is selected
4. Options:
5. Email
6. Automated Phone
7. Text – new descriptor
8. Location: Browser right of Send Requests to
9. Auto-filled from Listing > Contact Info page Preferred Method of Contact drop down box. If Primary Email or Secondary Email is
selected in Preferred Method of Contact, set Email as Contact by. If Primary Phone or Secondary Phone are selected as Preferred
Method of Contact, set Automated Phone as Contact By. If Text Primary Phone or Text Secondary Phone are selected as Preferred
Method, set Text as Contact By.
10. For example: If Alternate Agent #1 Preferred Method of Contact was Text Primary Phone and Owner #2 Preferred Method of
Contact was email, then .
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
If Email is selected enable “Email Address”
If Automated Phone is selected enable “Phone Number”
Set Contact By NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.5c.20. EMAIL ADDRESS – EMAIL TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Mandatory Field = Yes, if Contact By = Email
Field Header Text: “Email Address”
Enabled only if Contact By = Email
Location: Browser right of Contact by
Auto-fill from Listing > Contact Info selected y
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 106 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
User Actions
Type email address
System Response
Auto-fill from Alternate Agent or Owner info, if Alternate Agent, Owner #1 or 2 is selected in Send Requests To
Set Contact By Email NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.5c.21. PHONE – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Mandatory Field = Yes if Contact By = Phone
Field Header Text: “Phone Number”
Enabled only if Contact By = Phone
Standard Phone character format – see Appendix A for details
Location: Browser gith of Email Address
User Actions
Type phone number
System Response
Auto-fill from Alternate Agent or Owner info, if Alternate Agent, Owner #1 or #2 is selected in Send Requests To
Set Contact by Phone NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.5c.22. NO RESPONSE – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “If No Response within”
If selected, enable Contact By
Options:
Same as Showing Assist – see Showing Time Requirements
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set No Response Within NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.5c.23. CONTACT BY – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Contact By”
Enabled only if If No Response Within is selected
Options:
Email
Automated Phone
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 107 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Expand drop down box
If Email is selected enable “Email Address”
If Automated Phone is selected enable “Phone Number”
Set Contact By 2 NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.5c.24. EMAIL ADDRESS – EMAIL TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = Yes, if Contact By = Email
Field Header Text: “Email Address”
Enabled only if Contact By = Email
User Actions
Type email address
System Response
Auto-fill from Alternate Agent or Owner info, if Alternate Agent, Owner #1 or 2 is selected in Send Requests To
Set Contact by Email 2 NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.5c.25. PHONE – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = Yes if Contact By = Phone
Field Header Text: “Phone Number”
Enabled only if Contact By = Phone
Standard Phone character format – see Appendix A for details
User Actions
Type phone number
System Response
Auto-fill from Alternate Agent or Owner info, if Alternate Agent, Owner #1 or #2 is selected in Send Requests To
Set Contact by Phone 2 NEW FIELD
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 108 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
3.4.5d Promotions > Open Houses
Figure 15 - Marketing > Open House Page
Promotion Open House Vision Statement:
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 109 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
The Open House screen provides Users with fields and descriptors to accurately describe when the property is available for viewing. An
important change in this process is the need to collect details and include for distribution (including hot sheets) when the property is
submitted to the MLS.
User Stories:
The User wishes…
Acceptance Criteria:
Insert Here…
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 110 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
ID 3.4.5d.1.
R4 – Add/Update Section
BREADCRUMBS – DISPLAY TEXT, SAME FUNCTIONALITY AS R3 OPEN HOUSE LIGHT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
Field Header Text: “Promotions > Open Houses”
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.5d.2.
OPEN HOUSE – RADIO BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “Offering an Open House?”
Standard Radio Button options – see Appendix A for details
If Radio Button = Yes, enable the following fields:
Open House Type
Start Date
Start Time
AM/PM
End Date
End Time
AM/PM
Access Type
Access Info
Agent Info
Open House Remarks
User Action
Click Yes to add a new Open House
System Response
Enable the following fields:
Open House Type
Start Date
Start Time
AM/PM
End Date
End Time
AM/PM
Access Type
Access Info
Agent Info
Open House Remarks
ID 3.4.5d.3.
OPEN HOUSE TYPE – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory field = Yes
Field Header Text: “Open House Type”
Enabled if Open House = Yes
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 111 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
4.
5.
6.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Options:
Public Open
Broker
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Auto fill from user preferences if set
Set Open House Type
ID 3.4.5d.4.
START DATE – DATE FIELD WITH CALENDAR
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “Date of Next Open House
Enabled if Open House = Yes
Standard Date with Calendar Icon functionality – see Appendix A for details
Auto-fill if user preferences set with overwrite capability
User Actions
Type date
- or Click to open calendar to select date
System Response
Auto-fill from user preferences if set to next date
For example: if user set Thursday as Day of the Week and Current Date is January 3rd, set Date to 1/5/2011
Open calendar
Set Open House Begins
ID 3.4.5d.5.
START TIME – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “Start Time”
Enabled if Open House = Yes
Standard Time Options – see Appendix A for details
Auto-fill if user preferences set
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Auto-fill if user preferences set
Add to Open House Begins
ID 3.4.5d.6.
AM/PM – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Mandatory Field= Yes
Field Header Text: “AM/PM”
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 112 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
3.
4.
5.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Enabled if Open House = Yes
Location: Browser right of Start Time
Standard AM/PM Options – see Appendix A for details
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Auto-fill if user preferences are set
Add to Open House Begins
ID 3.4.5d.7.
END DATE – DATE WITH CALENDAR FIELD
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “End Time”
Enabled if Open House = Yes
Auto-fill if user preferences are set
Standard Date with Calendar Options – see Appendix A for details
User Actions
Type date
-- or -Click to expand calendar
System Response
Expand calendar
Auto-fill if user preferences are set
Set Open House Close
ID 3.4.5d.8.
END TIME – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “End Time”
Enabled if Open House = Yes
Location: Browser right of AM/PM field
Standard Time Options – see Appendix A for details
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Auto-fill if user preferences are set
Add to Open House Close
ID 3.4.5d.9.
AM/PM – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “AM/PM”
Enabled if Open House = Yes
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 113 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
4.
5.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Location: Browser right of End Time
Standard AM/PM options – see Appendix A for details
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Auto-fill if user preferences are set
Add to Open House Close
ID 3.4.5d.10. ACCESS TYPE – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “Access Type”
Enabled if Open House = Yes
Location: Below Start Time
Options:
Agent
Key at Front Desk
Lockbox
Owner
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Auto-fill if user preferences are set
Set Access Type
ID 3.4.5d.11. ACCESS INFO – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Mandatory Field: No
Field Header Text: “Access Info (Optional)”
Enabled if Open House = Yes
Options:
Sentrilock Lockbox
Supra Lockbox
Combination Lockbox
Key Pickup Required
Owner Will Provide Access
Other
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set Access Info
ID 3.4.5d.12. AGENT INFO – TEXT BOX
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 114 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field: Yes
Field Header Text: “Open House Agent Info”
Enabled if Open House = Yes
Auto-fill if user preference is set
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Auto-filled from Open House User Preferences if set
Set Open House Agent ID
ID 3.4.5d.13. LOOK IT UP - BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Enabled if Open House = Yes
Button Text: “Look It Up”
User Actions
Click to open Find Agent Wizard
System Response
Opens Find Agent Wizard
Set Open House Agent ID when Find Agent Wizard is closed
ID 3.4.5d.14. UPDATE PREFERENCES - BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory field: No
Enabled if Open House = Yes
Button Text: “Update Preferences”
User Actions
Click to update preferences
System Response
If user preferences have changed or not set, update Open House preferences
ID 3.4.5d.15. OPEN HOUSE REMARKS – LONG TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Mandatory Field: no
Field Header Text: “Open House Remarks”
Enabled if Open House = Yes
Maximum Characters: 1200
Include the following components:
Character counter
Spell check
Thesaurus
User Actions
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 115 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Type remarks
System Response
Set Open House Remarks
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 116 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
3.4.5e Promotions > Marketing
insert graphic and caption
ID 3.4.5e.1.
BREADCRUMBS
Description/Notes
1.
Field Header Text: “Promotions > Marketing”
User Actions
None
System Response
None
Note: This section is deferred until Imprev is implemented. Check with Adam Iobst for details.
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 117 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
3.4.5f Promotions > Share
insert graphic and caption
ID 3.4.5f.1.
BREADCRUMBS
Description/Notes
1.
Field Header Text: “Promotions > Share”
User Actions
None
System Response
None
Note: This section is deferred until Sharing is implemented on the landing page. Check with Tim Campbell for details.
Suggest including YouTube videos, per user requests
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 118 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
3.4.6a Financial > Lending
Figure 16 - Financial > Lending Page
Financial Tab Vision Statement:
The Financial tab collects details for all lending, tax, fees, assessments etc. In the current Keystone, fields relating to “numbers” were
found in different sections (Financial and Property). The new layout exposes (via sub headings in the tab) major categories. The User is
also able to benefit from calculating fields (sum of totals, toggle between annual and monthly costs etc). Finally the Investment section
has been refined and is aligned to work with a new 3rd party provider – aimed at showcasing properties for investors.
User Stories:
The user needs to…
Acceptance Criteria:
Insert Here
ID 3.4.6a.1.
BREADCRUMBS – DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
Field Header Text: “Financial > Lending”
User Action
None
System Response
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 119 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
None
ID 3.4.6a.2.
UPLOAD DOCUMENTS - BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Button Text: “Upload Documents”
Help Text: Training Department to provide
User Actions
Click open DocCentral to All Folders in light box
System Response
Open DocCentral to Lending Folder in light box
ID 3.4.6a.3.
CURRENT FINANCING – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
Field Header Text: “Current Financing”
Mandatory Field = No
Options:
Adjustable
Assumable must qualify (if selected, can not select Assumable may escrow or Assumable – Unrestricted)
Assumable may escrow (if selected, can not select Assumable must qualify or Assumable- Unrestricted)
Assumable – Unrestricted (if selected, can not select Assumable msut qualify or Assumable may escrow)
Community Development Administration - CDA
Clear
Conventional
Coop Rec Agreement
Federal Housing Administration - FHA
Farmers Home Administration - FmHA
Foreclosure (if selected, can not select Pre-foreclosure)
Government Bond
Government Insured / Guaranteed Loan
US Department of Housing and Urban Development - HUD
No Escalation
Not Assumable
Pre-foreclosure (if selected, can not select Foreclosure)
Private
Real Estate Owned property - REO
Tax Deferred Exchange
Veterans Administration - VA
Virginia Housing Development Authority - VHDA
Trust – Wrapped (if selected, can not select (Trust – 2nd /3rd )
Trust - 2nd / 3rd (if selected, can not select, Trust – Wrapped)
If Transaction Type = Foreclosure, select Foreclosure
If Transaction Type = REO, select Real Estate Owned property - REO
User Action
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Set: Current Financing/Loan
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 120 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
ID 3.4.6a.4.
R4 – Add/Update Section
NEW FINANCING – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
Field Header text: “New Financing”
Mandatory: No
Options:
Assumable must qualify (if selected, can not select Assumable – Unrestricted)
Assumable – Unrestricted (if selected, can not select Assumable must qualifiy)
Builders Terms
Buydown/ Subsidy
Community Development Administration (CDA)
Cash
Commercial Wrap
Cash Above Assumable Loan
Exchange / Trade
Federal Housing Administration - FHA
Federal Land Bank
Farmers Home Administration - FmHA
Home Purchase Assistance Program - HPAP
Include Qualify / Credit Check
Industrial Revenue Bonds - IRB
Joint Venture / Partnership
Lease Purchase
Negotiable
Owner Financing
Possible Rollback Tax
Private
Rent with Options to Buy
Seller will take 2nd / 3rd Wrap Loan (if selected, can not select Seller will take 1st Trust Loan)
Seller will take 1st Trust Loan (if selected can not select Seller will take 2nd/3rd Wrap Loan)
Seller Pays Closing Costs Veterans Administration – VA (if selected, can not select Veterans Administration – VA Substitute Elgibility)
Veterans Administration - VA Substitute Eligibility (if selected, can not select Veterans Administration – VA)
Virginia Housing Development Authority - VHDA
Will Subordinate
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set: Financial - New Financing
ID 3.4.6a.5.
EARNEST MONEY DEPOSIT – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Field Header Text: “Earnest Money Deposit”
Mandatory: No
User Actions
Type deposit amount
System Response
Set: Current Financing/Loan - Earnest Money Deposit
ID 3.4.6a.6.
3/11/16 10:46 PM
PROJECT APPROVED – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Page 121 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Field Header Text: “Project Approved”
Mandatory: No
Options:
Federal Housing Administration - FHA
Federal Home Loan Mortgage Corporation - FHLMC
Farmers Home Administration - FmHA
Federal National Mortgage Association - FNMA
Veterans Administration - VA
Virginia Housing Development Authority - VHDA
Section 8 (New Field)
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set: Financial - Project Approved
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 122 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
3.4.6b Financial > Fees
Figure 17 - Financial > Fees Page
Financial Fees Vision Statement:
The Financial Fees screen is drastically changed in the renovated application. The layout includes calculating field and allows the user to
“toggle” to enter or see costs in an annual or monthly format. If fees are applicable the field that describes what is included with the fees
is now located nearby.
User Stories:
The User wishes…
Acceptance Criteria:
Insert Here…
ID 3.4.6b.1.
BREADCRUMBS
Description/Notes
1.
Field Header Text: “Financial > Fees”
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 123 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.6b.2.
FEE/DEPOSIT TYPES – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1. Field Header Text: “Fee/Deposit Types”
2. Mandatory Field = Yes
3. Enables selected fields
4. Options:
5. Homeowners Association
6. Condo/Coop
7. Special Assessment 1
8. Special Assessment 2 (must select Special Assessment 1 first)
9. Community
10. Move-in
11. Elevator Use
12. Cleaning
13. Repair Deposit
14. Security Deposit
15. Water/Sewer Hookup
16. Other Fee
17. No Fees (no other selection may be made)
18. For example: If user selects Homeowners Association, Move-In and Cleaning in “Fee/Deposit Types” drop down box, all fields
would display; but only the fields (“Amount,” “Frequency,” and “Fee Includes” - Homeowners Association only) for Homeowners
Association, Move-In and Cleaning are enabled. If “No Fees” is selected no fields are enabled.
19. If Rent Includes is selected on Listing > Rental Tranaction Details page = Homeowners Association fee, disable Homeowners
Association option
20. If Rent Includes is selected on Listing > Rental Transactio Details page = Condominimum/Coop Fee, disable Condo/Coop option.
21. Help Tip: Training Department to provide content. Suggestion: explain why options are disable.
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set: Fees/Deposit - Types
Enable the following selected fields:
“Amount”
“Frequency”
“Fee Includes” (display only for Homeowners Association and Coop Fee)
If Fee/Deposit = Homeowners Association, Set Homeowners Association (Radio Button) = Yes (located on Community > Essentials)
ID 3.4.6b.3.
FEE TYPES - DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Table - Column 1
Homeowners Asociation
Condo/Coop Fee
Community
Special Assessment 1
Special Assessment 2
Move-in
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 124 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Elevator Use
Cleaning
Repair Deposit
Security Deposit
Processing Fee
Water/Sewer Hookup
Other Fee
Help Text: Training Department to provide
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.6b.4.
FEE AMOUNT – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Table - Column 2
Mandatory Field = Yes
Display for each Options:
Field/Column Header Text: “Fee Amount”
Enabled only if Field 1 is selected
If Type of Sale = Rental enable the following fields:
Condo/Coop Fee
Elevator Use
Homeowners Association
Move-in
Processing Fee
Repair Deposit
Security Deposit
Help Text: Training Department to provide
User Actions
Type fee amount in enabled text boxes
System Response
Set: Financial - Fee - Amount
ID 3.4.6b.5.
FEE FREQUENCY – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Table - Column 3
Mandatory Field = Yes
Display for each Options: in “Fees/Deposit/Types”
Field/Column Header Text: “Fee Frequency”
Enabled only if “Fees/Deposit/Types” is selected
Options:
Annually
Monthly
One Time
Quarterly
Semi-Annually
Unknown
User Actions
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 125 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set: Financial-Fees - Frequency
ID 3.4.6b.6.
FEE TOTAL – DISPLAY CALCULATION
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Table - Column 4
Column Header Text: “Fee Total”
Mandatory Field = No
Display calculated fee total amount based on “Amount” x “Fee Frequency”.
If either field is blank then display “Need more Info”
If Fee Type is disabled, leave field blank.
Help Text: Training Department to provide – New calculation capability – need to call out.
User Action
None
System Response
None – NOTE: this is a New Field
ID 3.4.6b.7.
FEE INCLUDES – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
Table - Column 5
Mandatory Field = No
Field/Column Header Text: “Fee Includes”
Display for following fields:
Homeowners Association
Condo/Coop Fee
Community
Special Assessment 1
Special Assessment 2
Enabled only if “Fee/Deposit Types” = “Homeowners Association”, “Condo/Coop” and/or “Community”
Options:
Pool – Indoor
Pool – Outdoor
Pool Membership Available
Pool
None of these (if selected, no other selection may be made)
Air Conditioning
Cable TV
Broadband
Common Area Management – CAM
Community Center
Custodial Services Maintenance
Electricity
Exterior Building Maintenance
Fiber Optics Available (if selected, can not select Fiber Optics at Dwelling)
Fiber Optics at Dwelling (if selected, can not select, Fiber Optics Available)
Gas
Golf Course
Heat
High speed Internet
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 126 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
51.
52.
53.
54.
55.
56.
57.
58.
59.
60.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Lawn Care front
Lawn Care rear
Lawn Care side
Lawn Maintenance
Management
Master Insurance Policy
Parking
Pet Area/Dog Park
Pier / Dock Maintenance
Pool(s) (if selected can not select Pool)
Recreational Facility
Reserve Funds
Road Maintenance
Security
Sewer
Snow Removal
Standard Phone Service
Taxes
Tennis Courts
Tot Lot(s) / Playground
Trash Removal
Underlying Mortgage
Water
Alarm System
Exercise Room
Laundry
Sauna
Security Gate
Builder / Developer
None
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set: HOA Condo Coop Community Amenities - HOA Coop Fee includes
ID 3.4.6b.8.
ALL FEES TOTAL – ACTIVE CALCULATED TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Field Header Text: “Annual Fee Total:” (default)
Mandatory Field = No
Location: Directly below “Fee Total”
Display Calculated Fee total based on adding all “Fee Total”
If any “Fee Total” field is Not calculable then display “Need more Info”
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.6b.9.
CALCULATE – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 127 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Calculate All Fees For”
Options:
Annual Total
Monthly Total
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Display new fee total
If “Monthly Total” is selected, Update “Annual Fees Total” to “Monthly Fees Total”
NOTE: This is a new Field
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 128 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
3/11/16 10:46 PM
R4 – Add/Update Section
Page 129 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
3.4.6c Financial > Tax Info
Figure 18 - Financial > Tax Info Page
Financial Tax Info Vision Statement:
The Financial Tax Info screen is pulls from property records to auto-fill fields. There are other fields that pertain to government
assessment fees located in this screen.
User Stories:
The User wishes…
Acceptance Criteria:
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 130 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Insert Here…
ID 3.4.6c.1.
BREADCRUMBS – DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
Field Header Text: “Financial > Tax Info”
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.6c.2.
UPLOAD DOCUMENTS - BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Mandatory Field = No
Button Text: “Upload Documents”
User Actions
Click to open DocCentral to All Folders in Light Box
System Response
Open DocCentral to All Folders in Light Box
ID 3.4.6c.3.
CITY/TOWN TAX – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “City/Town Tax (Optional)”
Auto-fill from Tax Records with Overwrite Capability
User Actions
Type tax amount to overwrite auto-fill
System Response
Auto-fill from Tax Records
Set: Property - Tax Info - City/Town Tax
ID 3.4.6c.4.
COUNTY TAX – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “County Tax (Optional)”
Auto-fill from Tax Records with Overwrite Capability
User Actions
Type to overwrite auto-fill
System Response
Auto-fill from Tax Records
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 131 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Set: Property - Tax Info - County Tax
ID 3.4.6c.5.
REFUSE/TRASH TAX – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Refuse/Trash Tax (Optional)”
User Actions
Type amount
System Response
Set: Property - Tax Info - Refuse
ID 3.4.6c.6.
SPECIAL TAX ASSESSMENT – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Special Tax Assessment (Optional)”
User Actions
Type amount
System Response
Set: Property - Tax Info - Special tax assessment
ID 3.4.6c.7.
TOTAL TAXES – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Total Taxes (Optional)”
Display Calculation from following fields:
“City/Town Tax” + “County Tax” + “Tap” + “Special Tax Assessment”
User Actions
Type to overwrite auto-fill
System Response
Calculation from following fields:
“City/Town Tax” + “County Tax” + “Tap” + “Special Tax Assessment”
Set: Property - Tax Info - Total Taxes
ID 3.4.6c.8.
TAX YEAR – YEAR TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Tax Year (Optional)”
Auto-fill from Tax Records with Overwrite Capability
User Actions
Type to overwrite auto-fill
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 132 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
System Response
Auto-fill from Tax Records
Set: Property - Tax Info - Tax Year
ID 3.4.6c.9.
ASSESSMENTS AND OTHER FEES – DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
Display Text: “Assessments and Other Fees”
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.6c.10. IMPROVEMENT AMOUNT – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Improvement Amount (Optional)”
Auto-fill from Tax Records with Overwrite Capability
User Actions
Type to overwrite auto-fill
System Response
Auto-fill from Tax Records
Set: Property - Tax Info - Improvement Amount
ID 3.4.6c.11. LAND ASSESSMENT AMOUNT – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Land Assessment Amount (Optional)”
Auto-fill from Tax Records with Overwrite Capability
User Actions
Type to overwrite auto-fill
System Response
Auto-fill from Tax Records
Set: Property - Tax Info - Land Assessment Amount
ID 3.4.6c.12. WATER/SEWER TAP FEES – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Water/Sewer Tap Fee (Optional)”
User Actions
Type amount
System Response
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 133 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Set: Property - Tax Info - Tap
ID 3.4.6c.13. TOTAL ASSESSMENT – DISPLAY CALCULATION
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Display Text: “Total Assessment”
Display Calculated amount “Improvement Amount” + “Land Assessment Amount”
User Action
None
System Response
Set: Property - Tax Info - Total Assessment
ID 3.4.6c.14. YEAR ASSESSED – YEAR TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Last Year Assessed”
Auto-fill from Tax Records with Overwrite Capability
User Actions
Type to overwrite auto-fill
System Response
Auto-fill from Tax Records
Set: Property - Tax Info - Year Assessed
ID 3.4.6c.15. AGRICULTURAL TAX DUE – RADIO BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = Yes if Lot/Land = Yes
Field Header Text: “Agricultural Tax Due?”
Standard radio button – See Appendix A for details
User Action
Click yes if Agricultural Tax is due
System Response
Set Agricultural Tax Due
ID 3.4.6c.16. PUBLIC RECORD KEY – DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Public Record Key”
Display Public Record Key
Auto-fill from Tax Record
User Action
None
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 134 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
System Response
None
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 135 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
3/11/16 10:46 PM
R4 – Add/Update Section
Page 136 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
3.4.6d Financial > Investment
Figure 19 - Financial > Investment page
NOTE: MRIS is reviewing a proposal from 3rd Party product supplier and SME (Greg Rand/OwnAmerica). Greg may supply help text for
the Investment section in addition to other field/API instructions to enable easy integration for his product and service. Kirk Lattner/Jeff
Jennings can also be of some service in reviewing this opportunity.
Financial Investment Vision Statement:
The Financial Investment focuses the User on details that will be of particular interest to Investors. New fields (identified by SME) are
included plus smart and calculating fields are being added to the application. The goal is to make a well completed Investment section be
part of a new searchable set of details (promoting the property as special interest for the Investor segment).
User Stories:
The User wishes…
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 137 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Acceptance Criteria:
Insert Here…
ID 3.4.6d.1.
BREADCRUMBS – DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
Field Header Text: “Financial > Investment”
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.6d.2.
UPLOAD DOCUMENTS - BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Mandatory Field = No
Button Text: “Upload Documents”
User Action
Click to Open DocCentral to Listing Folder in light box
System Response
Open DocCentral to Listing Folder in Light box
ID 3.4.6d.3.
ADDITIONAL INCOME SOURCE – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Additional Income Source (Optional)”
Options:
Apartment Rentals
Concessions
Laundry
Parking
Professional Offices
Shop rentals
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set: Financial - Investment -> Additional Income Sources
ID 3.4.6d.4.
RENTAL YEAR – DATE WITH CALENDAR FIELD
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Field header Text: “Rental Year”
Mandatory Field = No
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 138 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
3.
4.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Standard Date with Calendar field – see Appendix A for details
Character Format: mm/yy
User Actions
Type year
System Response
Open Calendar to current month with current date selected
Set Financial - Investment -> Additional Income Sources - Rental Year
ID 3.4.6d.5.
TENANCY DURATION – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “Tenancy Duration”
Options:
Month-to-Month Lease(s)
6 Months
1 Year Lease(s)
2 Year Lease(s)
3+ Year Lease(s)
Lease terms Mixed
Vacant
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set Financial - Investment -> Additional Income Sources - Tenancy
ID 3.4.6d.6.
INVESTOR RATIO – NUMBER FIELD
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Field Header Text: “Investor Ratio”
Mandatory Field = No
User Actions
Type number
System Response
Set Financial - Investment -> Additional Income Sources - Investor Ratio
ID 3.4.6d.7.
PRESENT LICENSES – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Field Header Text: “Present Licenses”
Mandatory Field = No
Options:
Beer/Wine
Food
Liquor
None
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 139 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set Financial - Investment -> Additional Income Sources - Present Licenses
ID 3.4.6d.8.
SELLER DESIRES – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Field Header Text: “Seller Desires”
Mandatory Field = No
Options:
1031 Exchange
Cash
Equity Participation
Ground Lease
Joint Venture
Lease Options
Sale of Owner's Interest
Sell/Lease Back
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set Financial - Investment -> Additional Income Sources - Seller Desires
ID 3.4.6d.9.
SPECIAL PERMITS – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1. Field Header Text: “Special Permits”
2. Mandatory Field = No
3. Options:
4. United States Army Corps of Engineers
5. Deck, Construction of Non-permanent (if selected, can not select Pavement, Shelter, Deck, Non-permanent)
6. Shelter, Construction of Non-permanent (if selected, can not select Pavement, Shelter, Deck, Non-permanent)
7. Stairs/Walkway, Construction of
8. Critical Area Commission
9. Common Facility / Use, Establish a
10. Facility / use, Exp
a common
11. Grade / Dredge / Fill
12. Install Light / Electrical Fixture
13. Landscaping
14. Pavement, Shelter, Deck, Non-permanent (if selected, can not select Deck, Construction of Non-Permanent or Shelter,
Construction of Non-permanent)
15. Storage Building, Non-permanent
16. Residential Use Permit
17. Valid Drain field Permit
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 140 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Expand drop down box
Set Special Permits - New Field -
ID 3.4.6d.10. ROOM RENT TYPES – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Field Header Text: “Room Types Available”
Mandatory Field = No
Options:
Efficiency
Single Room
One Bedroom
Two Bedroom
Three Bedroom
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Enable “# of Rooms” Avg Monthly Rent, Total Monthly Rent, # Occupied and Vacancy Rate per selection
ID 3.4.6d.11. NUMBER OF ROOMS PER ROOM TYPE – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Column 1
Field Header Text: “# of ” + Room Types
Mandatory Field = Yes
Repeat field for each Room Rent Type Option
Enable only if cooresponding Room Rent Type is selected
User Action
Type number of rooms
System Response
If enabled and completed Set the following fields:
Financial - Investment -> Additional Income Sources - # of Efficiencies
Financial - Investment -> Additional Income Sources - # of Single Rooms
Financial - Investment -> Additional Income Sources - # of One Bedroom
Financial - Investment -> Additional Income Sources - # of Two Bedroom
Financial - Investment -> Additional Income Sources - # of Three Bedroom
ID 3.4.6d.12. AVG RENT PER ROOM TYPE – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Field Header Text: None
Mandatory Field = No
Enabled only if selected in Field 1
User Actions
Type average rent for each type of room selected
System Response
If enabled and completed Set the following fields:
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 141 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Financial - Investment -> Additional Income Sources - Efficiency Avg Rent
Financial - Investment -> Additional Income Sources - One Bedroom Avg Rent
Financial - Investment -> Additional Income Sources - Two Bedroom Avg Rent
Financial - Investment -> Additional Income Sources - Three Bedroom Avg Rent
ID 3.4.6d.13. TOTAL MONTHLY RENT PER ROOM TYPE – ACTIVE DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1. Auto-fill with Calculated Total Monthly Rent for each selected Room Type based on # of Room Type x Room Type Avg Rent,
where Room Type = Selected Room Type in field 3.4.6d.12
2. Overwrite capability
User Actions
Type total monthly rent, to overwrite autofilled number
System Response
Display Total Monthly Rent
ID 3.4.6d.14. NUMBER OCCUPIED – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: None
User Actions
Type number occupied
System Response
If enabled and completed set the following fields to “Yes”:
Set Financial - Investment -> Additional Income Sources – Occupied
ID 3.4.6d.15. VACANCY RATE PER ROOM TYPE – PERCENTAGE TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Auto-fill - Calculated based on Number of Selected Room Type - Number Occupied Room Type /100
Overwrite capability
User Actions
Type to overwrite auto-fill vacancy rate
System Response
Set Financial - Investment -> Additional Income Sources - Vacancy Rate (%)
ID 3.4.6d.16. GROSS MONTHLY RENT – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Field Header Text: “Gross Monthly Rent”
Mandatory Field = Yes
Calculate Based on All Total Monthly Rent entered
Overwrite capability
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 142 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
User Actions
Type to overwrite auto-filled number
System Response
Set Financial - Investment -> Additional Income Sources - Gross Monthly Rent
ID 3.4.6d.17. ANNUAL RENT INCOME – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Field Header Text: “Annual Rent Income”
Mandatory Field = No
Calculate based on Gross Monthly Rent x 12
Auto-fill based on “Gross Monthly Rent”
Overwrite capability
User Actions
Type to overwrite auto-filled number
System Response
Set Financial - Investment -> Additional Income Sources - Annual Rent Income
ID 3.4.6d.18. OWNER EXPENSES – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
Field Header Text: “Owner Expenses”
Mandatory Field = No
Options:
Accounting/Legal
Advertising/Licenses and Permits
Miscellaneous
Payroll
Property Insurance
Property Management
Repairs and Maintenance
Reserves for Replacement
Services (All)
Staff Apartment
Supplies
Taxes-Personal property
Taxes-Real Estate
Utilities
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set Financial - Investment -> Additional Income Sources - Owner Expenses
ID 3.4.6d.19. ANNUAL OPERATING EXPENSES – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Field Header Text: “Annual Operating Expenses”
Mandatory Field = Yes
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 143 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
User Actions
Type number
System Response
Set Financial - Investment -> Additional Income Sources - Annual Operating Expenses
ID 3.4.6d.20. ANNUAL GROSS OPERATING INCOME – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Field Header Text: “Annual Gross Operating Income”
Mandatory Field = Yes
User Actions
Type number
System Response
Set Financial - Investment -> Additional Income Sources - Annual Gross Operating Income
ID 3.4.6d.21. ANNUAL NET OPERATING INCOME – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Field Header Text: “Annual Net Operating Income”
Mandatory Field = No
Calculate based on “Annual Rent Income” - “Annual Operating Expenses” + “Additional Income Source”
With Overwrite capability
User Actions
Type number
System Response
Set Financial - Investment -> Additional Income Sources - Annual Net Operating Income
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 144 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
3.4.7a Building > Exterior Essentials
Figure 20 - Building > Exterior Essentials Page
Building Tab Vision Statement:
The Building tab provides a new method for organizing and collecting property data. The past system limited details to a “home” or unassigned level (e.g. amenity = granite counters {which room?}, high ceilings {seemingly applies to the whole home}). Changes in the
revised Keystone navigation call for the property to be described from broad (architectural style, construction materials, major systems)
to the narrow (room/level assignment, details for each assigned room). Care has been taken to provide system checks or reduce
potential for differing or conflicting details and for the most part, the U/I takes care of these (reducing the need to generate new business
rules).
User Stories:
The user needs to…
Acceptance Criteria:
Insert Here
ID 3.4.7a.1.
3/11/16 10:46 PM
BREADCRUMBS – DISPLAY TEXT
Page 145 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Description/Notes
1.
Field Header Text: “Exterior Details > Essentials”
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.7a.2.
DWELLING TYPE – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “Dwelling Type”
If “Property Type” = “Residential”
Options:
Attached/Row House
Back-to-Back
Bed & Breakfast
Detached
Double Wide
Duplex
Dwelling With Rental
Garage/Parking Space
Floors - Garden 1-4
Floors - Mid-Rise 5-8
Floors - Hi-Rise 9+
House of Worship
Mobile
Multi-Family
Multiplex
Over Storefront
Patio Home
Penthouse
Quad
Rooming House
Semi-Detached
Townhouse
Triplex
Vacation Home
Vacation Rental
Help Text: Training Department to provide
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set: Architectural Style - Dwelling Type
If Dwelling Type = Townhouse enable Townhouse Type
ID 3.4.7a.3.
TOWNHOUSE TYPE – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
Mandatory Field = No
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 146 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Field Header Text: “Townhouse Type”
Options:
End (if selected, can not select Interior)
Interior (if selected, can not select End)
Upper (if selected, can not select Lower)
Lower (if selected, can not select Upper)
Detached (if selected, can not select Multiplex, Piggyback or Quad)
Multiplex (if selected, can not select Detached, Piggyback or Quad)
Piggyback (if selected, can not select Detached, Multiplex or Quad)
Quad (if selected, can not select, Detached, Multiplex, Piggyback)
Location: Browser right of Dwelling Type
Enabled if Dwelling Type = Townhouse
User Action
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set Townhouse Type
ID 3.4.7a.4.
ARCHITECTURAL STYLE – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “Architectural Style”
Display thumbnails and short descriptions of each style when “More” is clicked
If Dwelling Type = Single Family display:
A-Frame
Art Deco
Arts & Crafts
Beaux Arts
Bi-Level
Bungalow
Cabin
Cape Cod
Carriage House
Chalet
Colonial
Contemporary
Cottage
Craftsman
Dome
Dutch Colonial
Farm House
Farm House/National Folk
Federal
French Country
French Provincial
Georgian
International
Log Home
Manor
Post and Beam
Prairie
Provincial
Raised Rambler
Raised Rancher
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 147 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
35. Rambler
36. Rancher
37. Salt Box
38. Spanish
39. Split Foyer
40. Split Level
41. Traditional
42. Transitional
43. Tudor
44. Victorian
45. Villa
46. Note: Suggestion – provide visual examples of each type. Need to work with Training and Marketing to select and secure
images Help Text: Training Department to provide
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set: Architectural Style - Architectural Style
ID 3.4.7a.5.
NEW CONSTRUCTION – RADIO BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “New Construction?”
Standard Radio Button Options – see Appendix A for details
User Action
Click yes if house is new construction
System Response
Set General - New Construction
ID 3.4.7a.6.
ORIGINAL BUILDER – TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Builder Name”
Location: Browser right of New Construction Radio Button
User Action
Type name of Original Builder name
System Response
Set Builder Info - Foundation - Builder Name, Original
ID 3.4.7a.7.
LOT # - NUMBER FIELD
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Lot # (Optional)”
Location: Browser right of Builder Name
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 148 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
4.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Enabled if New Construction = Yes
User Action
Enter Lot # in the Community
System Response
Set Lot# - NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.7a.8.
UPLOAD DOCUMENTS – BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Button Text: “Upload Documents”
Location: Browser right of Lot #
User Action
Click button to open Upload Button light box
System Response
Open Upload Documents light box
ID 3.4.7a.9.
PROJECT NAME – TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Mandatory Field = Yes, if New Construction = Yes
Field Header Text: “Building/Project Name”
User Action
Type name of project
System Response
Set Builder Info – Foundation - Building/Project Name
ID 3.4.7a.10. MODEL NAME – TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Model Name (Optional)”
User Action
Type model name
System Response
Set ?
ID 3.4.7a.11. YEAR BUILT – NUMBER BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “Year Built”
If New Construction = Yes Auto-fill with current year with overwrite capability
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 149 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
User Action
Type year renovated
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set Features - Year Built
ID 3.4.7a.12. PROPERTY CONDITION – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “Property Condition”
Options:
AS IS (if selected, can not select AS IS – Shows Well)
AS IS - Shows Well (NEW Descriptor) (if selected, can not select AS IS)
Building Winterized
Converted Use
Decorator Allow
Fixer-Upper
Home Warranty
Needs Work
Rehab Potential
Renovated/Remodeled
Restored
Scope Project
Shell
Shows Well
To Be Built
Under Construction
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
If Property Condition = Renovated/Remodeled enable Item Renovated and Year Renovated Text Box
If Property Condition = Converted Use enable Year Converted Text Box
Set: Property Condition - Property Condition
ID 3.4.7a.13. ITEM RENOVATED – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Item Renovate/Upgraded (Optional)”
Enabled only if Property Condition = Renovated/Remolded
Location: Browser right of Property Condition Multi Select drop down box
Options:
--Exterior Features
Doors
Exterior Construction
Foundation
Roofing
Siding
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 150 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
R4 – Add/Update Section
R-Factor
-- Systems/Utiliites
Cooling
Electric
Heating
Metering
Plumbing
Security System
Sewer/Septic
TV/Cable/Communications
Water Heater
Water Source
-- Rooms
Flooring
Kitchen
Kitchen Appliances
Bathroom
Walls – New Paint
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
If Item Renovated = one of the following selections:
Doors
Exterior Construction
Foundation
Roofing
Siding
R-Factor
Then Enable Year Renovated/Installed on Building > Building Materials page
If Item Renovated = one of the following selections:
Cooling
Electric
Heating
Metering
Plumbing
Security System
Sewer/Septic
TV/Cable/Communications
Water Heater
Water Source
Then Enable Year Renovated/Installed on Building > System/Utilities page
If Item Renovated = one of the following selections:
Flooring
Kitchen
Kitchen Appliances
Bathroom
Walls – New Paint
Then …
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 151 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
ID 3.4.7a.14. YEAR RENOVATED – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Year Renovated (Optional)”
Enabled if Property Condition = Renovated/Remodeled
Location: Browser right of Item Renovated drop down box
Standard Year field options – see Appendix A for details
User Action
Click to expand drop down box
Select the year the item was renovated
System Response
If Item Renovated = one of the following selections:
Doors
Exterior Construction
Foundation
Roofing
Siding
R-Factor
Then Auto-fill Year Renovated/Installed on Building > Building Materials page
If Item Renovated = one of the following selections:
Cooling
Electric
Heating
Metering
Plumbing
Security System
Sewer/Septic
TV/Cable/Communications
Water Heater
Water Source
Then Auto-fill Year Renovated/Installed on Building > System/Utilities page
Set ?
ID 3.4.7a.15. ADD ANOTER ITEM RENOVATED – NAV/LINK
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “+ Another Item Renovated”
User Action
Click to add another Renovated Item
System Response
Save Item Renovated and Year Renovated
Display Item Renovated and Year Renovated below Field Boxes
Clear Item Renovated and Year Renovated fields
ID 3.4.7a.16. YEAR CONVERTED – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 152 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Year Converted (Optional)”
Enabled only if Property Condition = Converted Use
Standard Year Field options – see Appendix A for details
Location: Browser right of Year Renovated
User Action
Type the year the house was converted
System Response
Set ?
ID 3.4.7a.17. ENTRANCE – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “Entrance”
Options:
1-3 Steps (New Descriptor)
Center Hall
Foyer
Hall
Living Room
Lower Level
Other
Side
Side Entrance
Split Foyer
Two Story Foyer
0 Steps (New Descriptor)
4-6 Steps (New Descriptor)
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set: Building Floor Plan - Main Entrance - Entrance
ID 3.4.7a.18. HOUSE DIMENSIONS – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “House Dimensions (Optional)”
Auto-fill from Tax Record, with overwrite capability
”Width” and “Length” in text box
Location: Length Browser right of Width Text Box
User Actions
Type length
System Response
Set: Building - Measurements - House Dimensions Width
Set: Building - Measurements - House Dimensions Length
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 153 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
ID 3.4.7a.19. FINISHED ABOVE GRADE – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Finished Above Grade Square Feet (Optional)”
User Actions
Type number
System Response
Set: Building - Measurements - Finished Above Grade Square Feet
ID 3.4.7a.20. FINISHED BELOW GRADE – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Finished Below Grade Square Feet (Optional)”
Location: Browser Right of Finished Above Grade
User Actions
Type number
System Response
Set: Building - Measurements - Finished Below Grade Square Feet
ID 3.4.7a.21. TOTAL SQUARE FEET – DISPLAY CALCULATED TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Mandatory Field = No
Display Calculated Finished Total Square Feet
User Actions
None
System Response
Set: Building - Measurements - Finished Total Square Feet
ID 3.4.7a.22. UNFINISHED ABOVE GRADE – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Unfinished Above Grade Square Feet (Optional)”
User Actions
Type number
System Response
Set: Building - Measurements - Unfinished Above Grade Square Feet
ID 3.4.7a.23. UNFINISHED BELOW GRADE – NUMBER TEXT BOX
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 154 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Unfinished Below Grade Square Feet (Optional)”
User Actions
Type number
System Response
Set: Building - Measurements - Unfinished Below Grade Square Feet
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 155 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
3/11/16 10:46 PM
R4 – Add/Update Section
Page 156 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
3.4.7b Building > Systems and Utilities
Figure 21 - Building > System Utilities Page
Building Systems and Utilities Vision Statement:
The Systems and Utilities screen seeks to organize major building systems in one area. New to the renovated product is the combination
of “type of fuel” and “type of system” in the same field (e.g. Cooling System – Electric / Central AC). New descriptors are also coordinated
for TV/Cable/Communications. There is also heavy usage of the “TAG” for Eco-friendly for many of the descriptors in this section (noted
along with appropriate descriptors).
User Stories:
The User needs….
Acceptance Criteria:
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 157 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Insert here…
ID 3.4 7b.1.
BREADCRUMBS
Description/Notes
1.
Field Header Text: “Building > Systems and Utilities”
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4 7b.2.
COOLING SYSTEM AND FUEL – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “Cooling System and Fuel”
See Appendix A for Standard Sort Order
Options:
Attic Fan
Ceiling Fan(s)
a. TAG Amenity
7. Central A/C
8. Dehumidifier
9. Geo-thermal Heat Pump (if selected, can not select Heat Pump(s))
a. TAG Eco
b. TAG Amenity
10. Heat Pump(s) (if selected, can not select Geo-thermal Heat Pump)
11. Programmable Thermostat
a. TAG Eco
12. Solar - Active/Passive (If selected, can not select Solar – Off Grid, Solar – On –Grid, Solar – Rough-In, Solar Attic Fan or Solar –
Photovoltaic)
a. TAG Eco
b. TAG Amenity
13. Solar - Off Grid (if selected, can not select, Solar – Active/Passive, Solar – On Grid, Solar – Rough-in, Solar Attic Fan or Solar –
Photovoltaic)
a. TAG Eco
14. Solar - On Grid (if selected, can not select, Solar – Active/Passive, Solar – Off Grid, Solar – Rough –In, Solar Attic Fan or Solar –
Photovoltaic)
a. TAG Eco
15. Solar - Rough-in (if selected, can not select, Solar – Active/Passive, Solar – Off Grid, Solar – On Grid, Solar Attiv Fan or Solar
Photovoltaic)
16. Solar Attic Fan (if selected, can not selelct, Solar – Active/Passive, Solar – Off Grid, Solar – On Grid, Solar – Rough-in or Solar –
Photovoltaic)
a. TAG Eco
17. Wall Unit
18. Whole House Fan
19. Window Unit(s)
20. Zoned
21. Energy Star Cooling System
a. TAG - Eco
22. Bottled Gas
23. Electric
24. Geo-thermal
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 158 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
a. TAG Eco
25. Natural Gas
26. Solar - Photovoltaic (if selected, can not select Solar – Active/Passive, Solar – Off Grid, Solar – On Grid, Solar – Rough-In, or
Solar Attic Fan)
a. TAG Eco
27. Wind Turbine / Power
a. TAG Eco-Friendly
28. None
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set: Building - Cooling Fuel - Cooling Fuel and
Building - Cooling System - Cooling
ID 3.4 7b.3.
YEAR RENOVATED/INSTALLED – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Column 2
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Year Renovated/Installed (Optional)
Enabled and Auto filled if Year Renovated is selected on Building > Exterior Essentials
Location: Browser right fo each field
Standard Year Field Options – see Appendix A for details
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set ? if overwritten
ID 3.4 7b.4.
HEATING SYSTEM AND FUEL – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “Heating System and Fuel”
Options:
Energy Star Heating System
a. TAG Eco
90% Forced Air
Baseboard
Ceiling
Central
Electric Air Filter
Floor Furnace
Forced Air
Geo-Thermal
a. TAG Eco
b. TAG Amenity
Geo-thermal Heat Pump (if selected, can not select Heat Pump(s))
a. TAG Eco
Heat Pump(s) (if selected, can not select Geo-thermal Heat Pump)
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 159 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Hot Water
Programmable Thermostat
Radiant
Radiator
Solar (if selected, can not select Solar – On Grid or Solar – Roughed-in)
a. TAG Eco
Solar - On Grid (if selected, can not select Solar or Solar – Roughed-in)
a. TAG Eco
Solar - Roughed-in (if selected, can not select Solar or Solar – On Grid)
a. TAG Eco
Space Heater
Steam
Summer/Winter Changeover
Wall Unit
Wood Burning Stove
Zoned
Heat is Common
Bottled Gas/Propane
Central
Coal
Electric
Kerosene
Natural Gas
Oil
Wood
None
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set: Building - Heating Fuel - Heating Fuel and
Building - Heating System - Heating
ID 3.4 7b.5.
WATER SOURCE AND TYPE – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “Water Source and Type”
Options:
Bottled Gas
Coal
Electric
Instant Hot Water
Multi-tank
Natural Gas
Solar
a. TAG Eco
Cistern
Community
Conditioner
Filter
Grey Water
Lateral Not Installed/Tap Off Main
Permit Applied for (if selected, can not select Permit Not Applied for or Permit on File)
Permit Not Applied for (if selected, can not select Permit Applied for or Permit on File)
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 160 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Permit On File (if selected, can not select Permit Applied for or Permit Not Applied for)
Public (if selected, can not select Public Hook Up Available)
Public Hook Up Available
Rainwater Harvesting
a. TAG Eco
Shared
Shared Spring
Spring
Tap Fee
Well
With-in 50 Feet
None
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set: Water
ID 3.4 7b.6.
HOT WATER – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “Hot Water Heater Type and Fuel”
Options:
Oil
Summer/Winter Changeover
Tank 60+ Gallon
Tankless
Wood
Electric
Gas
None
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set: Hot Water - Hot Water Heater
ID 3.4 7b.7.
SEWER/SEPTIC – MUTLI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “Sewer/Septic”
Options:
All Common
Applied for Permit
Bottled Gas
Capping Fill
Cess Pool
Cistern
Coal
Community
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 161 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
12. Conditioner
13. Electric
14. Filter
15. Gravity Septic Field
16. Grey Water
17. Grinder Pump
18. Holding Tank
19. Instant Hot Water
20. Lateral Not Installed/Tap Off Main
21. Lateral/Tap On-site
22. Low Pressure Pipe (LPP)
23. Mound System
24. Multi-tank
25. Natural Gas
26. Not Applied for Permit
27. Permit Applied for
28. Permit Not Applied for
29. Permit On File
30. Pressure Dose
31. Public
32. Public Hook Up Available
33. Public Septic
34. Public Sewer
35. Rainwater Harvesting
36. Septic
37. Septic - Equal to Number of Bedrooms (if selected, can not select Septic – Greated than number of Bedrooms, or Septic – Less
Than Number of Bedrooms)
38. Septic - Greater Than Number of Bedrooms (if selected, can not select Septic – Equal to Number of Bedrooms, or Septic – Less
than Number of Bedrooms)
39. Septic - Less Than Number of Bedrooms (if selected can not select Septic – Equal to Number of Bedrooms or Septic – Greater
Than Number of Bedrooms)
40. Septic Pump
41. Sewer Tap Fee
42. Shared
43. Shared Septic
44. Shared Sewer
45. Shared Spring
46. Site Evaluation On File
47. Solar
48. Spring
49. Tap Fee
50. Well
51. With-in 50 Feet
52. None
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set: Sewer/Septic - Water
ID 3.4 7b.8.
ELECTRIC – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “Electric”
Options:
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 162 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
4.
5.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Electricity "is" Separate
220 Line
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
If “Electricity "is" Separate” is selected Set: Metering - Electric
If “220 Line” is selected Set: TV/Cable/Communications - Electric Set
ID 3.4 7b.9.
METERING – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Metering (Optional)”
Enabled only if Type of Ownership = Condo, Coop, or Rental Apartment
Options:
All Common
Fully Separate
Electric is Separate
Heat is Common
Gas is Separate
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set: Metering - Metering
ID 3.4 7b.10. SECURITY SYSTEM – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Security System (Optional)”
Options:
24 Hour Security
Carbon Monoxide Detectors
Desk in Lobby
Doorman
Electric Alarm
Exterior Cameras
Fire Detection System
Intercom
Main Entrance Lock
Monitored
Motion Detectors
Non-Monitored
Resident Manager
Security Gate
Security System
Smoke Detector
Sprinkler System - Indoor
Surveillance System
Window Grills
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 163 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set: Security - Security
ID 3.4 7b.11. TV/CABLE/COMMUNICATIONS – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “TV/Cable/Communications (Optional)”
Options:
Cable TV – Dwelling (if selected, can not select Cable TV – Lot Line or Cable TV – Prewired)
Cable TV - Lot Line (if selected, can not select Cable TV – Dwelling or Cable TV – Prewired)
Cable TV – Prewired (if selected, can not select Cable TV – Dwelling or Cable TV – Lot Line)
DSL Available
Intercom
ISDN at Dwelling
Multiple Phone Lines
Phone Jacks - Modular
Phone Jacks - Plug
Satellite Receiver/Dish
Special Power
TV Antenna
TV Jacks
Underground Utilities
Wired for FiOS
Wired for DSL
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
If “Wired for FiOS” or “Wired for DSL”, include in Interior Details > Room Details > Special Features.
Set: TV/Cable/Communications - TV/Cable/Communications
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 164 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
3.4.7c Building > Building Materials
Figure 22 - Building > Building Materials Page
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 165 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Building Materials Vision Statement:
The Building Materials screen presents fields and descriptors organized around the structural components and materials in the building.
New fields are exposed to let the User describe the age of updated materials and the layout is designed to get information quickly input.
User Stories:
The User needs….
Acceptance Criteria:
Insert here…
ID 3.4.7c.1.
BREADCRUMBS – DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
Field Header Text: “Exterior Details > Building Materials”
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.7c.2.
EXTERIOR CONSTRUCTION – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “Exterior Construction”
Options:
Brick and Siding
Concrete/Block
Log
Modular/Manufactured
Precast Concrete
Structural Insulated Panel System - SIPS
T-1-11
Trombe Wall
Wood Frame
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set: Exterior Construction - Exterior Construction
ID 3.4.7c.3.
YEAR RENOVATED/INSTALLED – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Column 2
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Year Renovated/Installed (Optional)”
Enabled and Auto-filled from Building > Exterior Essentials > Year Renovated
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 166 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
5.
6.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Location: Browser right of each field
Standard Year Options – See Appendix A for details
User Action
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set ? if overwritten
ID 3.4.7c.4.
ROOFING – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Roofing (Optional)”
Options:
Architectural
Asbestos
Asphalt Shingle
Cedar/Shake
Composite
Concrete
Copper
Fiberglass Shingle
Foam
Hip
Metal
Other
Rubber
Slate
Stagger/Built-up
Tar & Gravel
Tile
Unknown
Vegetated Roof
Wood Shingle
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set: Roofing - Roofing
ID 3.4.7c.5.
SIDING – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “Siding”
Options:
Aluminum/Steel Siding
Asbestos
Brick Front
Cedar
Combination
Composite
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 167 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Dryvit
Fiber Cement
Hardiplank
Log
Masonite
Metal
Other
Shake
Shingle
Siding - Synthetic Stucco
Stone
Stucco
Vinyl
Wood
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set: Exterior Construction - Siding
ID 3.4.7c.6.
FOUNDATION – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Foundation (Optional)”
If “None” is selected No other selection may be made
Options:
Block/Brick
Concrete
Concrete Block
Concrete Piers
Concrete Slab
Crawl Space
None
Permanent
Pilings
Slab
Stone Foundation
Wood
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set: Foundation - Foundation
ID 3.4.7c.7.
DOORS – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Doors (Optional)”
Options:
Doors - Atrium
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 168 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
R4 – Add/Update Section
French Doors
Green House
Insulated Door (s)
Six Panel Doors
Sliding Glass Door(s)
Storm Door(s)
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set: Windows/Doors - Doors
ID 3.4.7c.8.
R-FACTOR CEILINGS – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “R-Factor Ceilings (Optional)”
User Actions
Type number
System Response
Set: Building - Measurements - R-Factor Ceilings
ID 3.4.7c.9.
R-FACTOR WALLS – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “R-Factor Exterior Walls (Optional)”
User Actions
Type number
System Response
Set: Building - Measurements - R-Factor Exterior Walls
ID 3.4.7c.10. R-FACTOR BASEMENT – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “R-Factor Basement (Optional)”
User Actions
Type number
System Response
Set: Building - Measurements - R-Factor Basement
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 169 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
3/11/16 10:46 PM
R4 – Add/Update Section
Page 170 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
3.4.7d Building > Exterior Features
Figure 23 - Building > Exterior Features Page
ID 3.4.7d.1.
BREADCRUMBS
Description/Notes
1.
Field Header Text: “Building > Building Materials”
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.7d.2.
DECK/BALCONY/PORCH – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Deck/Balcony/Porch (Optional)”
Options:
Balconies-Multiple
Balcony
Brick Porch
Deck
Deck #2 (must select Deck first)
Deck-Tiered
Decks-Multiple
Patio
Porch
Porch - Enclosed
Porch - Front
Porch - Rear
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 171 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Porch - Screened
Porch - Side
Porch - Wraparound
Roof Deck
Sidewalks
Slate Porch
Terrace
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set: Lot Description- Exterior Features - Deck/Balcony/Porch
ID 3.4.7d.3.
GARAGE – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Garage (Optional)”
Options:
Attached
Detached
Front Loading Garage
Side Loading Garage
Underground
Workshop
Auto Garage Door Opener
Garage/Parking Space
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set: Type of Garage - Garage
ID 3.4.7d.4.
NUMBER OF GARAGE SPACES – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Number of Garage Spaces (Optional)”
Character Format: ##
Format Change
Location: Browser Right of “Garage”
Enabled only if “Garage” is selected
User Actions
Type number
System Response
Set: Parking - Number of Garage Spaces
ID 3.4.7d.5.
3/11/16 10:46 PM
POOL/SPA – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Page 172 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Description/Notes
1. Mandatory Field = Yes
2. Field Header Text: “Private Pool/Spa Type”
3. Options:
4. No Pool on Property (display first, no other selection allowed)
5. Indoor Hot Tub
6. Indoor Pool
7. Outdoor Hot Tub
8. Outdoor Pool
9. Pool - Above Ground (if selected, can not select Pool – In Ground)
10. Pool - In Ground (if selected, can not select Pool – Above Ground)
11. Sauna
12. Steam Shower
13. Whirlpool Jets
14. Help Tips: This field only identified pool/spa within property lines, if there is a pool within the Community, please see
Community > Essentials (provide link to Community > Essentials page)
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set: Amenities - Pool/Spa
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 173 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
3.4.7e Building > Interior Essentials
Figure 24 - Building > Interior Essentials
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 174 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
ID 3.4.7e.1.
R4 – Add/Update Section
BREADCRUMBS – DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
Field Header Text: “Building > Interior Essentials”
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.7e.2.
FLOOR PLAN DESCRIPTIONS – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Floor Plan Descriptions (Optional)”
Options:
Open
Traditional
If “Type of Ownership” = Condo or Coop then Options:
Efficiency
Flat
Jr. 1 Bedroom
Loft
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set: Building Floor Plan - Rooms
ID 3.4.7e.3.
ATTIC – RADIO BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “Attic?”
Standard Radio button options see Appendix A
User Actions
Click Yes add Attic
System Response
If “Yes” is selected Enable Attic Type/Access
ID 3.4.7e.4.
ATTIC TYPE – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No, Yes if Attic radio button = Yes
Field Header Text: “Attic Type (Optional)”
Location: Browser Right of Attic Radio Button
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 175 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Options:
Access Only
Finished
Floored
Partially Finished
Storage Only
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set: Amenities - Attic Access and Amenities - Attic Type
If “Finished” or “Partially Finished” are selected, “Attic” displays as a separate highest level with Room Types – Multi Select drop down
box – see prototype at http://share.axure.com/T0RY6A/ for functional details
ID 3.4.7e.5.
BASEMENT – RADIO BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “Basement?”
Standard Radio button options see Appendix A
User Actions
Click Yes to add Basement
System Response
If “Yes” is selected enable Basement Type
ID 3.4.7e.6.
BASEMENT TYPE – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
Mandatory Field = No, Yes if Basement radio button = Yes
Field Header Text: “Basement Type/Access (Optional)”
Location: Browser Right of Basement Radio Button
Options:
Crawl Space
Daylight Full
Daylight Partial
English
Full
Fully Finished
Heated
Improved
Slab
Sub
Sump Pump
Unfinished
Workshop
Partial
Partially Finished
Roughed-in Bath
Shelving
Space for Rooms
Windows
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 176 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set: Basement Type - Basement Type and
Basement Type - Basement
depending on selection
If “Fully Finished” or “Partially Finished” are selected, “Basement” displays as a separate lowest level with Room Types – Multi Select
drop down box – see prototype at http://share.axure.com/T0RY6A/ for functional details
ID 3.4.7e.7.
CHOOSE LEVELS – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “Choose Levels”
Options:
Main
Upper 1
Upper 2
Upper 3
Lower 1
Lower 2
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set: Rooms - Levels - Room Level
Enable Selected Level Room Type drop down boxes in Table Column 1
ID 3.4.7e.8.
ARCHITECTURAL STYLE – IMAGE/TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Mandatory Field = No
Display Text Line 1: “Based on the Architectural Style you selected (insert selected “Architectural Style”)”
Display Text Line 2: “These are your suggested Levels”
Image: Line Sketch of Selected Architectural Style showing Levels
Image Approx width: 220 px
Image Approx height: 100 px
User Actions
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.7e.9.
ROOM TYPES – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1. Mandatory Field = Yes
2. Table - Column 1
3. Field Header Text Options:
4. “Main Level Room Types”
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 177 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
51.
52.
53.
54.
55.
56.
57.
58.
59.
60.
61.
62.
63.
R4 – Add/Update Section
“Upper 1 Level Room Types”
“Upper 2 Level Room Types”
“Upper 3 Level Room Types”
“Lower 1 Level Room Types”
“Lower 2 Level Room Types”
Options:
Bathroom
Bathroom – Master
Bedroom
Bedroom – Master
Breakfast Room
Carport
Den
Den/Study/Library
Dining Room
Efficiency (Additional)
Enclosed Glass Porch
Family Room
Foyer
Game/Exercise Room
Garage
Great Room
In-law/AuPair/Suite
Kitchen
Laundry
Library
Living Room
Loft
Mud Room
Photo Lab/Darkroom
Professional Office
Recreation Room
Second Story Family Overlook
Second Story Family Room
Sitting Room
Solarium
Storage Room
Sun/Florida Room
Utility Room
Workshop
Atrium
Balcony
Bar
Basement (enabled for Lower 1 and 2 only)
Butler’s Pantry
Conservatory
Enclosed Porch/Deck
Exercise Room/Gym
Garage
In-law Suite
Loft
Media Room
Morning Room
Office
Parlor
Sauna
Screened-in Porch
Second Kitchen
Solarium
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 178 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
64.
65.
66.
67.
68.
69.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Sunroom
Ski Prep Room
Sewing Room
Hobby/Wrapping Room
Panic Room
Dining Room - Formal
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Multi Select drop down box displays Options: with “+” and without checkboxes. Users can select multiples of the same room type by
selecting the Options: more than once. The selected room type displays in the confirmation box below with a count. The count continues
to the next level.
For example: “+ Bedroom” is selected (3) times on Upper 1 Level. “Bedroom 1” “Bedroom 2” “Bedroom 3” displays in the Upper 1 Level
Room Types confirmation box. And is selected (1) time on Lower 1 Level, “Bedroom 4” is displayed Lower 1 Level Room Types
confirmation box.
Selected Room Type name displays as Nav/Link Browser in column 2, “Summary of All Rooms”
If any of the following fields are selected on Main Level
Set: Building Floor Plan - Story List - Main Level - Number of Bedrooms:
“Bedroom”
If “Bedroom - Master” is selected, display “1” in “# of Master Bedrooms” in free form text box
If one of the following fields are selected increase “Total Bedrooms Summary”:
“Bedroom”
“Bedroom - Master”
If one of the following fields are selected increase “Total Full Baths Summary”:
“Bathroom”
“Bathroom - Master”
If “Bathroom - Master” is selected, display “1” in “# of Master Bathrooms?” in free form text box
If any of the following fields are selected on Upper 1 Level
Set: Building Floor Plan - Story List - Bedrooms, Number of - Upper Level 1:
“Bedroom”
If “Bedroom - Master” is selected, display “1” in “# of Master Bedrooms” in free form text box
If one of the following fields are selected increase “Total Bedrooms Summary”:
“Bedroom”
“Bedroom - Master”
If one of the following fields are selected increase “Total Full Baths Summary”:
“Bathroom”
“Bathroom - Master”
Missing Room Type:
If Selected Room Types does Not include
“Bedroom”
“Bedroom - Master”
“Bathroom”
“Kitchen”
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 179 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Then display message box “You have Not selected a (Missing Room Type) for this listing, would you like to do that Now?”
Increase “Total Room Summary” for each Room Type selected
Selected Room Type name displays as Nav/Link Browser in column 2
ID 3.4.7e.10. ADD ROOM DETAILS – NAV/LINK
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Add Room Details”
Location: Directly below Room Types Multi select drop down box align right
Displays First Room on “Room Details” Page from Selected Level
For Example: User clicks Lower 1 Level “Add Room Details,” “Basement” would display expanded.
User Actions
Click to add room details on a selected room level
System Response
Displays First Room on “Room Details” Page from Selected Level
ID 3.4.7e.11. BUILT-IN CUSTOMIZATIONS – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Mandatory Field = No
Table - Column 1
Field Header Text: “Built-in and Customizations (Optional)”
Sort order: display in alphabetical order
Options:
Above Ground Jacuzzi
Built-in Bookcases
Built-in China Cabinet
Cedar Closet
Ceiling Fan Conveys
Curved Staircase
Double/Dual Staircase
Elevator
Furniture Conveys
Multiple Ceiling Fans
None
Water Closet
Wet Bar/Bar
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set: Amenities - Built-in and Customization
ID 3.4.7e.12. DISABILITY ACCESSIBILITY – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Disability Accessibility (Optional)”
Table - column 1
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 180 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Options:
2+ Access Exits
32"+ Wide Doors
36"+ Wide Halls
48"+ Wide Halls
Chairlift
Doors - Lever Handle
Doors - Recede
Doors - Swing in
Elevator
Entry Slope Less than 1 Foot
Flooring Modified
Garage Door Greater than 84 Inches
Grab Bars Modified
Hearing Modified
Kitchen Modified
Level Entry - Main
Low Bathroom Mirrors
Low Closet Rods
Low Pile Carpeting
None
Other Bathroom Modified
Ramp - Main Level
Roll in Shower
Roll under Vanity
Sight Modified
Thresholds Less than 5/8 Inches
Vehicle Transfer Area
Wheelchair Height Mailbox
Wheelchair Height Shelves
Wheelchair Modified
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set: Disability Access - Disability Accessibility
ID 3.4.7e.13. SUMMARY OF ROOMS – NAV/LINK
Description/Notes
1. Mandatory Field = No
2. Location: Browser right of Level Room Types
3. Table - column 2
4. Field Header Text: “Summary of All Rooms”
5. Display selected room types by level.
6. Field Footer Text Line 1: “Total Bedrooms:” (Total Bedrooms Summary)
7. Field Footer Text Line 2: “vs Tax Records:” (Total Bedrooms Summary from Current Tax Records)
8.
9. If No fields are completed, then only display Room Type name.
10. As “Main fields” (Mandatory and Options: fields only) are completed on Room Type page percent completed displays on
Essential page. “Apply to” drop down boxes are not included in percent complete calculation.
11.
12. If “Total Bedrooms Summary” and “Total Bedrooms Summary from Current Tax Records” are Not equal, display higher number
as “+(count difference) in red.
13.
14. For example: If Total Bedrooms Summary equals 5 and Total Bedrooms from Current Tax Records equals 6 display as below:
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 181 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
15.
16. “Total Bedrooms: 5
17. vs Tax Records: +1”
18.
19. If “Total Bedrooms from Current Tax Records” is Not available, then display “N/A”
User Actions
Click to room name to add room details
System Response
Display selected room expanded on Room Details page
ID 3.4.7e.14. TOTAL BATHROOM – DISPLAY COUNT
Description/Notes
1. Mandatory Field = No
2. Field Footer Text Line 1: “Total Bathrooms:” (Total Full Baths Summary)
3. Field Footer Text Line 2: “vs Tax Records:” (Total Full Baths Summary from Current Tax Records, if available) - (spans column 45)
4. Location: Browser right of “Total Bedrooms” display text
5.
6. If “Total Full Baths Summary” and “Total Full Baths Summary from Current Tax Records” are Not equal, display higher number
as “+(count difference) in red.
7.
8. If “Total Full Baths Summary from Current Tax Records” is Not available, then display “N/A”
9.
10. For example: If Total Full Baths Summary equals 5 and Total Bathrooms from Current Tax Records equals 6 display as below:
11.
12. “Total Bathrooms: 3
13. vs Tax Records: +1”
User Actions
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.7e.15. TOTAL FIREPLACE/LEVELS – DISPLAY COUNT
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Footer Text Line 1: “Total Fireplace: “ (# of Fireplaces)
Field Footer Text Line 2: “Total Levels: “ (# of Levels (Including basement))
Location: Browser right of “Total Bathrooms” display text
User Actions
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.7e.16. TOTAL ROOMS – DISPLAY COUNT
Description/Notes
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 182 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
5. Mandatory Field = No
6. Field Footer Text Line 1: “Total Rooms: “ (Total Room Count)
7. Field Footer Text Line 2: “vs Tax Record: “ (Total Room Count from Current Tax Record if available)
8. Location: Browser right of “Total Fireplace/Levels” display text
9.
10. If “Total Room Count” and “Total Room Count from Current Tax Record” are Not equal, display higher number as “+(count
difference) in red.
11.
12. If “Total Room Count from Current Tax Record” then display “N/A””
13.
14. For example: If “Total Room Count” equals 15 and “Total Room Count from Current Tax Record” equals 16 display as below:
15.
16. “Total Rooms: 15
17. vs Tax Records: +1”
User Actions
None
System Response
None
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 183 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
3/11/16 10:46 PM
R4 – Add/Update Section
Page 184 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
3.4.7f Building > Room Details
Figure 25 - Building > Room Details Page
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 185 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
ID 3.4.7f.1.
R4 – Add/Update Section
BREADCRUMBS – DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
Field Header Text: “Building > Room Details”
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.7f.2.
SELECTED LEVEL – NAV/LINK
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text when collapsed (default): “-” Selected Level
Field Header Text when expanded: “+” Selected Level
User Actions
Click to display all rooms on selected level
System Response
Show/Hide all rooms on Selected Level
ID 3.4.7f.3.
ROOM NAME – NAV/LINK
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text Expanded: “-” Room Name
Field Header Text Collapsed: “+” Room Name
Display one room expanded at time
When expanded display following fields:
“Choose Photo”
“Dimensions”
“Room Shape”
“Fireplace?”
“Type/Fuel”
“Features”
“Ceilings/Walls/Windows”
“Apply To:”
“Copy Room”
“Delete Room”
“Compare Room”
When collapsed, display “+” Room Name
User Actions
Click to add room details
System Response
When expanded display following fields:
“Dimensions”
“Room Shape”
“Fireplace?”
“Type/Fuel”
“Features”
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 186 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
“Ceilings/Walls/Windows”
“Apply To:”
“Copy Room”
“Delete Room”
“Compare Room”
ID 3.4.7f.4.
ROOM TYPE – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text Options:
“Bathroom Type”
“Dining Room Type”
“Kitchen Type”
”Attic Access”
”Basement Access”
Field Header Text: “Bathroom Type”
Field Options:
Display only if Bathroom = Selected Room Name
“Bathroom - Full”
“Bathroom - Master”
“Bathroom - Quarter”
“Bathroom - Half”
“Bathroom - roughed in”
Increase “Total Full Baths Summary” if one of the following fields are selected:
“Bathroom - Full”
“Bathroom - Master”
Increase “Total Half Baths Summary” by +1 if one of the following fields are selected:
“Bathroom - Quarter”
“Bathroom - Half”
Field Header Text: “Dining Room Type”
Display if Selected Room name = one of the following:
“Dining Room - Formal”
“Dining Room”
“Breakfast Room”
Field Header Text: “Kitchen Type”
Display if Selected Room name = one of the following:
“Second Kitchen”
“Kitchen”
Field Options for both “Dining Room Type” and “Kitchen Type”:
2nd Kitchen
Breakfast Bar
Breakfast Nook
Breakfast Room
Butlers Pantry
Country
Dining "L"
Dining Combo
Eat-in
Efficiency
Family Combo
Galley
Gourmet
Island
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 187 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
50.
51.
52.
53.
54.
55.
56.
57.
58.
59.
60.
61.
62.
63.
64.
65.
66.
67.
68.
69.
70.
71.
72.
73.
74.
75.
76.
77.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Kitchenette
Living - Dining Combo
Living Combo
Off Family Room
Other
Separate Dining Room
Table Space
Field Header Text: “Attic Access”
Display if Selected Room name = Attic
Options:
Walk-in
Stairs Fixed
Stairs Pull Down
Access Only
Field Header Text: “Basement Access”
Display if Selected Room name = “Basement”
Options:
Areaway/Cellar Exit
Cellar Entrance
Connect Stairway
Front Entrance
Inside Access
None
Outside Entrance
Rear Entrance
Side Entrance
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set Access or Type depending on Selected Room Type Name
ID 3.4.7f.5.
CHOOSE PHOTO - SLIDER
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Choose Photo (Optional)”
Thumbnails of Category Identified or Caption in Media Connect
Max Number (6)
Approx width: 20 px
Approx height: 20 px
Hover to Magnify
Magnified photo size
Approx width: 100 px
Approx height: 100 px
Include the follow fields from Media Connect:
Category
Caption
User Actions
Hover to magnify
Click to select main photo
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 188 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
System Response
Click to identify main photo for Room Type
Control Click to identify multiple photos
“Select All” selects all photos
Other photos (if any) dim but still enabled
Photos magnify in Horizontal Slider with black background
ID 3.4.7f.6.
DIMENSIONS – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = ?
Field Header Title: “Dimensions (Optional)”
Field 1: “Width”
Field 2: “Length” Browser right of Width
User Actions
Type dimensions
System Response
Set: Building - Measurements - House Dimensions Length and Building - Measurements - House Dimensions Width
ID 3.4.7f.7.
ROOM SHAPE – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Room Shape (Optional)”
Location: Browser Right of “Dimension” field
Options:
Regular
Irregular
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set: NEW FIELD Room Shape
ID 3.4.7f.8.
FLOORING – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1. Mandatory Field = No
2. Field Header Text: “Flooring (Optional)”
3. Display on ALL room details
4. Options:
5. Wall-to-Wall Carpeting
6. Wood Floors
7. Bamboo
8. Other
9. Area Room Size Rug
10. Brick
11. Carpet
12. Ceramic Tile
13. Concrete
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 189 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Cork
Granite
Hardwood
Laminate
Marble
Natural Fiber Carpeting
Parquet
Pergo
Recycled Carpeting
Renewable Floor Coverings
Slate
Terrazzo
Vinyl
Vinyl Under Carpet
Wood
Wood Under Carpet
If “Apply To:” has been previously set, Auto-fill with previous section with overwrite capability
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set: Rooms - Floors - Flooring Type
ID 3.4.7f.9.
CEILINGS/WALLS/WINDOWS – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Ceilings/Walls/Windows (Optional)”
Display on ALL room details
Options:
--Ceilings
Recessed Lighting
2 Story
9'+
Beamed
Cathedral
High
Low
Tray
Vaulted
Wood
-- Walls
Chair Railing
Crown Molding
Wainscoting
Brick
Dry Wall
Logo
Masonry
Other
Plaster Walls
Vinyl
Walls
Wood
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 190 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
51.
52.
53.
54.
55.
56.
R4 – Add/Update Section
--Windows
Shades/Blinds
Drapes/Curtains
Drapery Rods
EnergyStar Windows
Low-E Windows
Triple Pane Windows
Atrium
Bay/Bow
Glass block
Transom Obscure glass
Awning Double hung Hopper
Casement
Double Pane
Insulated Window (s)
Other
Palladian Windows
Screens
Skylight(s)
Storm Windows
Solar Tubes
Vinyl Clad
Wood Frame
57. If “Apply To:” has been previously set, Auto-fill with previous section with overwrite capability
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set: Rooms - Floors - Flooring Type
Set: Walls/Ceilings - Walls
Set: Windows/Doors - Windows
Set: Walls/Ceilings - Ceilings
ID 3.4.7f.10. FEATURES – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Features”
Standard Options:
Humidifier
Water Conditioner
Fresh Air Recovery System
Air Purification System
Air Cleaner
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
If Selected Room name = one of the following
“Second Kitchen”
“Kitchen”
Field Options:
Energy Star Appliances
Appliances less than 2 years old – New Descriptor
Cooktop
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 191 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
51.
52.
53.
54.
55.
56.
57.
58.
59.
60.
61.
62.
63.
64.
65.
66.
67.
68.
69.
70.
71.
72.
73.
74.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Cooktop - Down Draft
Dishwasher
Disposal
Exhaust Fan
Extra Refrigerator/Freezer
Freezer
Icemaker
Microwave
Oven - Double
Oven - Self Cleaning
Oven - Single
Oven - Wall
Oven/Range - Electric
Over/Range - Gas
Range Hood
Refrigerator
Stove
Stove - Six Burner
Trash Compactor
Water Dispenser
Set: Appliances - Kitchen Appliances
If Selected Room Name = one of the following:
“Laundry - Bedroom Level”
“Laundry - Kitchen Level”
“Laundry - Separate Room”
“Laundry - Upper Level”
Field Options:
Laundry Chute
Washer/Dryer Hookup
Dryer
Dryer - Front Loading
Washer
Washer - Front Loading
Washer/Dryer Stacked
Set: Appliances - Laundry Appliances
Display if Selected Room Name = “Bathroom - Master”
Field Options:
Attached
Separate Shower
Separate Tub
Tub - 2+ person
Tub - Soaking
Toilets - High Efficiency
Full Bathroom
Half Bathroom
Quarter
2 Attached Baths
Bath Ceramic Tile
Bidet
Dual Entry
Toilets - Dual Flush
Set: Amenities - Bathroom
If “Half Bathroom” is selected, increase “Total Half Baths Summary” count
Increase “Total Bathrooms” + .5
If “Full Bathroom” is selected, increase “Total Full Baths Summary” count
Update “Bathroom count” in Room Summary
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 192 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
75. Display if Selected Room Name = “Bathroom”
76. Field Options:
77. Toilets - High Efficiency
78. Full Bathroom
79. Half Bathroom
80. Quarter
81. 2 Attached Baths
82. Bath Ceramic Tile
83. Bidet
84. Dual Entry
85. Toilets - Dual Flush
86. Whirlpool Jets
87. Set: Amenities - Bathroom
88. If “Half Bathroom” is selected, increase “Total Half Baths Summary” count
89. If “Full Bathroom” is selected, increase “Total Full Baths Summary” count
90. Update “Bathroom count” in Room Summary
91.
92. Display if Selected Room Name = one of the following:
93. “Bedroom”
94. “Bedroom - Master”
95. Field Options:
96. Multiple
97. Walk-in-Closet
98. Walk-in Closet(s)
99. California Closet(st) New Descriptor
100. Entry Level - Bedroom (display only if Level = Main)
101.
102. Display if Selected Room Name = one of the following
103. “Second Kitchen”
104. “Kitchen”
105. “Bathroom”
106. “Bathroom - Master”
107. Field Options:
108. Ceramic
109. Corian
110. Granite
111. Double Vanities
112. PaperStone
113. Recycled Content
114. Separate Vanities
115. SileStone
116. Set: Amenities - Kitchen/Bathroom
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set fields as appropriate
ID 3.4.7f.11. FIREPLACE – RADIO BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “Fireplace?”
Options:
Yes
No - default when Selected Room Name = one of the following (otherwise no default selected):
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 193 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Attic
Bedroom
Breakfast Room
Carport
Den
Den/Study/Library
Efficiency (Additional)
Enclosed Glass Porch
Foyer
Game/Exercise Room
Garage
In-law/AuPair/Suite
Kitchen
Laundry
Mud Room
Photo Lab/Darkroom
Second Story Family Overlook
Second Story Family Room
Storage Room
Unfinished Basement
Utility Room
Workshop
Atrium
Balcony
Butler’s Pantry
Morning Room
Office
Parlor
Sauna
Screened-in Porch
Second Kitchen
Solarium
Sunroom
Ski Prep Room
Sewing Room
Hobby/Wrapping Room
Panic Room
Bathroom
User Actions
Click Yes to set fireplace
System Response
Enable “Fireplace Type”
Increase # of Fireplaces
ID 3.4.7f.12. FIREPLACE TYPE – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Fireplace Type”
Enabled only if “Fireplace” = Yes
Options:
Gas Insert
Heatilator
Wood Stove Insert
Decorative
Electric
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 194 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Free Standing
Gas
Pellet Burning
Pre-Fab
Wood Burning
Wood Stove
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set: Rooms - Fireplace - Fireplace
ID 3.4.7f.13. APPLY TO – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1. Mandatory Field = No
2. Field Header Text: “Apply To” within Single Select drop down box
3. Location: Browser below “Features” “Ceilings/Walls/Windows/Flooring” fields
4. Options:
5. “Apply To:”
6. “Whole House”
7. “This Level”
8. “All” Selected Room Type Name
9. Set selection field in Browser above “Apply to” selection.
10. For example: The main field is “Countertops” on the “” room detail page, the user selects “Corian.” Then in the “Apply To” field
located to the right, the user selects “All Bathrooms.” The system sets all Bathroom countertops to “Corian” throughout the listing.
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set selection field above to “Applied” Options: selected
ID 3.4.7f.14. ADMIN OPTIONS – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Options:
Admin Options: (default)
Copy Room
Delete Room
Save as Custom Template
Select Saved Custom Template (enabled only if a custom template is saved)
Compare Room
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
If “Copy Room” is selected: Open message box to select Level, Increase Room Name +1, Increase Total Room Count +1 and cancel button
If “Delete Room” is selected: Open message box to confirm deletion of selected room, Decrease Total Room Count and cancel button
If “Compare Room” is selected: ??
If “Save as Custom Template” is selected: Open message box to name Custom Template and save name with Save and cancel button
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 195 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
If “Select Saved Custom Template “is selected: Open message box with a drop down box of named custom templates and a “Open” and
cancel button
ID 3.4.7f.15. TOTAL ROOMS – DISPLAY COUNT
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Same functionality as Total Bedrooms, Total Bathrooms, Total Fireplace/Levels and Total Rooms on Building > Interior Essentials
Location: Bottom center of page, evenly distributed
User Actions
None
System Response
None
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 196 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
3/11/16 10:46 PM
R4 – Add/Update Section
Page 197 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
3.4.8a Lot/Land > Essentials
Figure 26 - Lot/Land > Essentials
Vision Statement:
User Stories:
The user needs to…
Acceptance Criteria:
Insert Here
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 198 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
ID 3.4.8a.1.
R4 – Add/Update Section
BREADCRUMBS – DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
Field Header Text: “Lot/Land > Essentials”
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.8a.2.
LOT TYPE – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Lot Type (Optional)”
Options:
Cul-de-sac
Flag Lot
Irregular Lot
Pipe Stem Lot
Farmette
Landlocked
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set: Lot - Descriptions (Lot Description) - Lot Type
ID 3.4.8a.3.
LOT DIMENSIONS – TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Lot Dimensions (Optional)”
Auto-fill from Tax records if available, with overwrite capability
Field Name, displayed in field:
Width
Length
Location: Browser right of Width
Depth
Location: Browser right of Length
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set: Lot Details - Lot Dimensions – Length
Set: Lot Details Lot Dimensions – Width
Set: Lot Details - Lot Dimensions – Depth
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 199 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
ID 3.4.8a.4.
R4 – Add/Update Section
NUMBER OF BUILDINGS – TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field: No
Field Header Text: ”Number of Buildings/Lots”
Location: Browser right of Lot Dimensions
User Actions
Type number of buildings
System Response
Set: Lot Description - # Building Sites/Lot
ID 3.4.8a.5.
ADDITIONAL LOT MLS# - MIXED NUMBER/TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Additional Lot(s) MLS#”
Comma to separate multiple MLS#’s
Character Format: XX#########
Location: Browser right of Additional Lot radio button
User Actions
Type MLS# using commas to separate multiple MLS# if necessary
System Response
If completed Set Lot - Descriptions (Lot Description) - Additional Lot(s) = Yes
Set Additional Lot MLS#-- NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.8a.6.
TOTAL ACREAGE – CALULATED NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field: Yes
Field Header Text: ”Total Lot Acreage”
Auto-fill Text: Calculate Lot Acreage: “Lot Dimensions - Length” x “Lot Dimensions - Width” / 43,560 with overwrite capability
User Actions
Type acreage to overwrite calculated number
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set: Lot Description- Exterior Features - Lot Acreage
ID 3.4.8a.7.
TOTAL SQ FOOTAGE – CALCULATE NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field: Yes
Field Header Text: “Total Lot Sq Footage”
Auto-fill Text: Calculate Lot Sq Footage: “Lot Dimensions - Length” x “Lot Dimensions – Width” with overwrite capability
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 200 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set Lot Description - Lot Size (Square Footage)
ID 3.4.8a.8.
PARKING – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1. Mandatory Field: Yes if Property Type = Residential
2. Field Header Text: “Parking (Optional)”
3. Options:
4. Additional Storage Area
5. Asphalt Driveway (if selected, can not select Brick Driveway, Concrete Driveway, Dirt Driveway, Gravel Driveway, Paved
Driveway, Riverstone Driveway, or Unpaved)
6. Assigned
7. Attendant
8. Brick Driveway (if selected, can not select Asphalt Driveway, Concrete Driveway, Dirt Driveway, Gravel Driveway, Paved
Driveway, Riverstone Driveway, or Unpaved)
9. Carport
10. Concrete Driveway (if selected, can not select Asphalt Driveway, Brick Driveway, Dirt Driveway, Gravel Driveway, Paved
Driveway, Riverstone Driveway, or Unpaved)
11. Covered Parking
12. Dirt Driveway (if selected, can not select Asphalt Driveway, Brick Driveway, Concrete Driveway, Gravel Driveway, Paved
Driveway, Riverstone Driveway, or Unpaved)
13. Driveway - Circular
14. Driveway - Off Street
15. Faces Front (if selected, can not select Faces Rear or Faces Side)
16. Faces Rear (if selected, can not select Faces Front or Faces Side)
17. Faces Side (if selected, can not select Faces Front or Faces Rear)
18. Free
19. Garage
20. Garage Door Opener
21. General Common Element
22. Gravel Driveway (if selected, can not select Asphalt Driveway, Brick Driveway, Concrete Driveway, Dirt Driveway, Paved
Driveway, Riverstone Driveway, or Unpaved)
23. Handicap Parking
24. Heated
25. Limited Common Element
26. No Parking – New Desriptor
27. Off Site Parking (if selected, can not select On-Site Parking – Rent or On-Site Parking – Sale)
28. On-Site Parking – Rent (if selected, can not select Off Site Parking or On-Site Parking – Sale)
29. On-Site Parking – Sale (if selected, can not select Off Site Parking or On-Site Parking – Rent)
30. Parking Fee
31. Parking Space Conveys
32. Paved Driveway (if selected, can not select Asphalt Driveway, Brick Driveway, Concrete Driveway, Dirt Driveway, Gravel
Driveway, Riverstone Driveway, or Unpaved)
33. Permit Required
34. Private 1-10 Spaces (if selected, can not select Private 11+ Spaces)
35. Private 11+ Spaces (if selected, can not select Private 1-10 Spaces)
36. Public Parking
37. Riverstone Driveway (if selected, can not select Asphalt Driveway, Brick Driveway, Concrete Driveway, Dirt Driveway, Gravel
Driveway, Paved Driveway, or Unpaved)
38. Shared Driveway
39. Street
40. Surface
41. Unassigned
42. Under Home Parking
43. Unpaved (if selected, can not select Asphalt Driveway, Brick Driveway, Concrete Driveway, Dirt Driveway, Gravel Driveway,
Paved Driveway, or Rivestone Driveway)
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 201 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
If selected: Set: Lot - Parking - Parking = Yes
Set: Parking - Parking
ID 3.4.8a.9.
NUMBER OF ASSIGNED SPACES – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Number of Assigned Spaces (Optional)”
User Actions
Type number of assigned parking spaces
System Response
Enabled only if “Assigned” is selected in “Parking”
Set: Parking - Number of Assigned Spaces
ID 3.4.8a.10. PARKING SPACE NUMBER – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Parking Space Number (Optional)”
User Actions
Type Parking Space Number
System Response
Enabled only if “Assigned” is selected in “Parking (Optional)”
Set: Lot Details - Parking Space Number
ID 3.4.8a.11. PARKING BLOCK/SQUARE – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Parking Block / Square (Optional)”
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Enabled only if “Assigned” is selected in “Parking”
Set Lot – Parking - Parking Block / Square
ID 3.4.8a.12. PARKING INCLUDED WITH LIST PRICE – RADIO BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Parking Included with List Price (Optional)”
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 202 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
3.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Standard Radio Button Options – See Appendix A for details.
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Enable only if one of the following fields is selected:
“On-site Parking - Rent”
“On-site Parking - Sale”
Set: Lot - Parking - Parking Lot (legal description)
ID 3.4.8a.13. NUMBER OF CARPORT SPACES – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Number of Carport Spaces (Optional)”
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Enabled only if “Carport” is selected in “Parking (Optional)”
Set: Parking - Number of Carport Spaces
ID 3.4.8a.14. EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT/FEATURES – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Exterior Equipment/Features (Optional)”
Options:
Bump-outs
Private Road
Secure Storage
Street Lights
Underground Lawn Sprinkler
Underground Utilities
Water Falls
Water Fountains
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set: Lot Details - Exterior Equipment/Features
ID 3.4.8a.15. LOT DESCRIPTION/IMPROVEMENT – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Lot Description/Improvement (Optional)”
Options:
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 203 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
4. Bulkheaded
5. Cleared
6. Flood Plain
7. Landscaping
8. Lot Premium
9. Marshy
10. Non-Tidal Wetland
11. Open
12. Partly Wooded
13. Pond
14. Poolside
15. Private
16. Rip-Rapped
17. Secluded
18. Stream / creek
19. Tidal Wetland
20. Trees / Wooded
21. Vegetation Planting
22. Zero Lot Line
23. Help Tips: Training to provide. Suggest: Ski-in/Ski-out can now be found on Community > Outdoor Recreation page. Water
Access, Water Front and Water View can now be found on Community > Water Oriented page.
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set: Lot - Descriptions (Lot Description) - Lot Description/Improvement
ID 3.4.8a.16. LOCATION TYPE – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Location Type (Optional)”
Options:
Adjoins National Forest
Adjoins National Park
Bay
Canal
Creek
Lagoon
Lake
Mountain
Near National Forest
Near National Park
Ocean
Pond
River
Slope Side
Spring
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set: Property Location -> Location Type - Location Type
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 204 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
ID 3.4.8a.17. LOT ACCESS – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Lot Access (Optional)”
Options:
No Thru Street
Unrestricted
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set: Lot - Descriptions (Lot Description) - Lot Access
ID 3.4.8a.18. ROAD TYPE/ACCESS – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Road Type/Access (Optional)”
Options:
Access - Below Grade (if selected, can not select Access – On Grade)
Access - On Grade (if selected, can not select Access – Below Grade)
Alley
Approved
Black Top
City/County
Commuter Rail - 1 mile
Concrete (if selected, can not select Dirt, Gravel, Paved, Tar and Chip or Unimproved)
Dirt (if selected, can not select Concrete, Gravel, Paved, Tar and Chip or Unimproved)
Easement / Right of Way
Gravel (if selected, can not select Concrete, Dirt, Paved, Tar and Chip or Unimproved)
Interstate Access
No Road
Paved (if selected, can not select Concrete, Dirt, Gravel, Tar and Chip or Unimproved)
Private Road (if selected, can not select Public Street)
Process for Approval
Public Street (if selected, can not select Private Road)
Railroad – Mainline (if selected, can not select Railroad – Siding, Railroad – Spur, Railroad – Potential)
Railroad – Siding (if selected, can not select Railroad – Mainline, Railroad – Spur, Railroad – Potential)
Railroad - Spur (if selected, can not select Railroad – Mainline, Railroad – Siding, Railroad – Potential)
Railroad- Potential (if selected, can not select Railroad – Mainline, Railroad – Siding, Railroad – Spur)
Road Maintenance Agreement
State Road (if selected, can not select US Highway/Insterstate)
Tar and Chip (if selected, can not select Concrete, Dirt, Gravel, Paved or Unimproved)
Unimproved Road (if selected, can not select Concrete, Dirt, Gravel, or Tar and Chip)
US Highway / Interstate (if selected, can not select, State Road)
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set: Roads - Roads
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 205 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
ID 3.4.8a.19. FENCING – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1. Mandatory Field = No
2. Field Header Text: “Fencing (Optional)”
3. Options:
4. Barbed Fence (if selected, can not select Board Fence, Chain Link Fence, Decorative Fence, Electric Fence, Fence, High Tensile
Fence, Panel Fence, Picket Fence, Split Rail Fence, Stone Fence, Vinyl Fence or Woven Wire Fence)
5. Board Fence (if selected, can not select Barbed Fence, Chain Link Fence, Decorative Fence, Electric Fence, Fence, High Tensile
Fence, Panel Fence, Picket Fence, Split Rail Fence, Stone Fence, Vinyl Fence or Woven Wire Fence)
6. Chain Link Fence (if selected, can not select Barbed Fence, Board Link Fence, Decorative Fence, Electric Fence, Fence, High
Tensile Fence, Panel Fence, Picket Fence, Split Rail Fence, Stone Fence, Vinyl Fence or Woven Wire Fence)
7. Decorative Fence (if selected, can not select Barbed Fence, Board Fence, Decorative Fence, Electric Fence, Fence, High Tensile
Fence, Panel Fence, Picket Fence, Split Rail Fence, Stone Fence, Vinyl Fence or Woven Wire Fence)
8. Electric Fence (if selected, can not select Barbed Fence, Board Fence, Chain Link Fence, Decorative Fence, Fence, High Tensile
Fence, Panel Fence, Picket Fence, Split Rail Fence, Stone Fence, Vinyl Fence or Woven Wire Fence)
9. Fence (if selected, can not select Barbed Fence, Board Fence, Chain Link Fence, Decorative Fence, Electric Fence, High Tensile
Fence, Panel Fence, Picket Fence, Split Rail Fence, Stone Fence, Vinyl Fence or Woven Wire Fence)
10. Fenced-Fully
11. Fenced-Invisible
12. Fenced-Partially
13. Fenced-Rear
14. High Tensile Fence (if selected, can not select Barbed Fence, Board Fence, Chain Link Fence, Decorative Fence, Electric Fence,
Fence, High Tensile Fence, Panel Fence, Picket Fence, Split Rail Fence, Stone Fence, Vinyl Fence or Woven Wire Fence)
15. Panel Fence (if selected, can not select Barbed Fence, Board Fence, Chain Link Fence, Decorative Fence, Electric Fence, Fence,
High Tensile Fence, Picket Fence, Split Rail Fence, Stone Fence, Vinyl Fence or Woven Wire Fence)
16. Picket Fence (if selected, can not select Barbed Fence, Board Fence, Chain Link Fence, Decorative Fence, Electric Fence, Fence,
High Tensile Fence, Panel Fence, Split Rail Fence, Stone Fence, Vinyl Fence or Woven Wire Fence)
17. Privacy Fence
18. Private Beach
19. Split Rail Fence (if selected, can not select Barbed Fence, Board Fence, Chain Link Fence, Decorative Fence, Electric Fence,
Fence, High Tensile Fence, Panel Fence, Picket Fence, Stone Fence, Vinyl Fence or Woven Wire Fence)
20. Stone Fence (if selected, can not select Barbed Fence, Board Fence, Chain Link Fence, Decorative Fence, Electric Fence, Fence,
High Tensile Fence, Panel Fence, Picket Fence, Split Rail Fence, Vinyl Fence or Woven Wire Fence)
21. Stone Retaining Walls
22. Vinyl Fence (if selected, can not select Barbed Fence, Board Fence, Chain Link Fence, Decorative Fence, Electric Fence, Fence,
High Tensile Fence, Panel Fence, Picket Fence, Split Rail Fence, Stone Fence, or Woven Wire Fence)
23. Woven Wire Fence (if selected, can not select Barbed Fence, Board Fence, Chain Link Fence, Decorative Fence, Electric Fence,
Fence, High Tensile Fence, Panel Fence, Picket Fence, Split Rail Fence, Stone Fence, or Vinyl Fence)
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set: Lot Description- Exterior Features - Fencing
ID 3.4.8a.20. ANIMAL AMENITIES – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Animal Amenities (Optional)”
Options:
Horses Allowed
Kennels
Riding Arena
Riding Trails
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 206 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set: Lot Description- Exterior Features - Animal Amenities
ID 3.4.8a.21. SPORT AMENITIES – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Sport Amenities (Optional)”
Options:
Hot Tub
Outside Shower
Play Area
Pool - Above Ground (if selected, can not select Pool – In Ground)
Pool - In Ground (if selected, can not select Pool – Above Ground)
Private Pier
Sport Court
Tennis Court(s)
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set: Lot Description- Exterior Features - Sport/Activity
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 207 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
3.4.8b Lot/Land > Details
Figure 27 = Lot/Land > Details Page
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 208 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
ID 3.4.8d.1.
R4 – Add/Update Section
BREADCRUMBS – DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
Field Header Text: “Lot/Land > Details”
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.8d.2.
DEVELOPMENT STATUS – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
Mandatory Field = No, Yes if Property Type = Lot/Land
Field Header Text: “Development Status (Optional)”
Options:
Bonded
Building Permit(s)
Curb Cuts (if selected, can not select Curb/Gutter)
Curb/Gutter (if selected, can not select Curb Cuts)
Drainfield Permit(s)
Engineer Drawings
Finished Lots
Master Plan
Plat Approved (if selected, can not select Plat Recorded)
Plat Recorded (if selected, can not select Plat Approved)
Preliminary Plan Review
Raw Land
Ready to Bond
Site Plan
Site Plan Approved (if selected, can not select Site Plan Recorded)
Site Plan Recorded (if selected, can not select Site Plan Approved)
Utilities at Site (if selected, can not select Utilities W/In 50’)
Utilities W/In 50' (if selected, can not select Uilities at Site)
Zoned
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
If Development status is selected, enable Estimated Finished Residence Price
Set: Development Status - Development Status
ID 3.4.8d.3.
ESTIMATED FINISHED RESIDENCE PRICE – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Estimated Finished Residence Price”
Enabled only if Development Status is selected
Location: Browser right of Development Status
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 209 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
User Actions
Type potential list price
System Response
Set Estimate Finished Residence Price – NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.8d.4.
BUILDING PERMITS – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Mandatory Field = No, Yes if Property Type = Lot/Land
Field Header Text: “Building Permits (Optional)”
Options:
Application Pending
Cost to Obtain
Impact Fee
No Building Permits
No to Obtain
Not Obtainable
On Hand
Unknown
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set: Building Permits - Building Permits
ID 3.4.8d.5.
PRESENT USE – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
Mandatory Field = Yes if Property Type = Lot/Land
Field Header Text: “Present Use”
Options:
Car Wash
Commercial
Convenience Store
Double - Wide
Drive - Thru
Driving Range
Dry Cleaner
Financial
Funeral Home
Golf Course
Hotel / Motel
Hunting
Industrial
Land / Lot Only
Livestock
Manufacturing
Marina
Medical Offices
Mixed
Mobile / Trailer Park
Office
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 210 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Other
Parking
Recreation
Residential (if selected, can not select Residential – Multi)
Residential - Multi (if selected, can not select Residential)
Restaurant
Retail (if selected, can not select Retail/Wholesale)
Retail/Wholesale (if selected, can not select Retail)
Sand / Gravel / Dirt
Senior Assisted / Day Care
Spa
Storage Yard
Telecommunication Site
Timber
Warehouse
Enable Potential Use when selected
User Action
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Enable Potential Use
Set Present Use
ID 3.4.8d.6.
POTENTIAL USE – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
Mandatory Field = No, Yes if Property Type = Lot/Land
Field Header Text: “Potential Use”
Enabled only if Present Use is selected
Options:
Agriculture
Commercial
Double - Wide
Hunting
Industrial
Livestock
Mixed
Office
Other
Recreation
Residential
Retail / Wholesale
Sand / Gravel
Warehouse
Location: Browser right of Present Use
User Action
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set Potential Use
ID 3.4.8d.7.
3/11/16 10:46 PM
ZONING CODE – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Page 211 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No (If Property type = Residential) Yes (If Property Type = Lot/Land)
Field Header Text: “Zoning Code”
Auto-fill from tax records
User Actions
Type to overwrite auto-filled number
System Response
Set Lot – Descriptions - Zoning Code
ID 3.4.8d.8.
ZONING CLASSIFICATION – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Zoning/Classification (Optional)”
Options:
Master Plan Zoning
Planned Unit Development - PUD
Transfer Development Rights - TDR
Location: Browser right of Zoning Code
Enabled only if Zoning Code is completed
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set: Lot - Descriptions (Lot Description) - Zoning/Classification
ID 3.4.8d.9.
PERC REPORT – RADIO BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Mandatory Field = No, Yes if Property Type = Lot/Land
Field Header Text: “Perc Report?”
Standard Radio Button options – see Appendix A for details
If yes, enable the following fields:
Perc Test
Number:
User Action
Click yes if Perc Report is available
System Response
Enable Number of Perc Sites
Set Lot Description - Description - Perc Report
ID 3.4.8d.10. PERC TEST – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Perc Text (Optional)”
Options:
Approved Perc
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 212 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Failed Perc
None
Unknown
Verify Perc
If yes, enable Number of Perc Sites
User Action
Click yes if Perc Report is available
System Response
Enable Number of Perc Sites
Set Lot Description - Description - Perc Test
ID 3.4.8d.11. NUMBER OF PERC SITES – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “# of Perc Sites (Optional)”
Character Format: ##
Enabled only if Perc Report = Yes
Location: Browser right of Perc Report
User Actions
Type number
System Response
Set: Lot- Description - # of Perc Sites
ID 3.4.8d.12. NUMBER OF BEDROOM PERCS – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Filed = No
Field Header Text: “# of Bedroom Percs”
Enabled only if Perc Report = Yes
Location: Browser right of Number of Perc Sites
User Action
Type number
System Response
Set Lot- Description - # of Bedroom Perc
ID 3.4.8d.13. SOIL TYPES – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Soil Types”
Options:
Clay
Limestone / Shale
Loam
Luka - Lindside-Cordorus
Manor - Gleneig
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 213 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Neshaminy - Urban Land
Rocky
Sandy
Soil Study Available
Udorthents
Unknown (if selected, can not make any other selection)
Urban Land - Beltsville - Chillum
Urban Land - Brandywine
Urban Land - Cristiana - Sunnysider
Urban Land - Galestown - Rumford
Urban Land - Manor- Gleneig
Urban Land - Sassafras - Chillum
Urban Land Not Rated
ID 3.4.8d.14. TOPOGRAPHY – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Topography”
Options:
Bottom Land
Downhill
Drainage Composition
High Bank
Hilly
Level
Low Bank
Marshy
Medium Bank
Moderate Slope
Ravine
Rolling
Rough Grade
Sloped
Topographic Plat
Uphill
User Action
Click to expand the drop down box
System Response
Expand the drop down box
Set Topography
ID 3.4.8d.15. ROAD FRONTAGE – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Road Frontage Footage”
Enable the following fields:
Setback – Front
Setback – Rear
Setback - Side
User Action
Type amount of road frontage
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 214 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
System Response
Set Lot – Description – Road Frontage
ID 3.4.8d.16. SETBACK – FRONT – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Setback – Front Footage”
Enabled only if Road Frontage is completed
Location: Browser right of Road Frontage
User Action
Type Setback Frontage footage
System Response
Set Lot – Description - Setback - Front
ID 3.4.8d.17. SETBACK – REAR – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Setback – Rear Footage”
Enabeled only if Road Frontage is completed
Location: Browser right of Setback – Front
User Action
Type Setback – Rear footage
System Response
Set Lot – Description – Setback Rear
ID 3.4.8d.18. SETBACK – SIDE – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Setback – Side Footage”
Enabled only if Road Footage is completed
Location: Browser right o Setback – Rear
User Action
Type Setback – Side footage
System Response
Set Lot – Description – Setback Rear
ID 3.4.8d.19. OTHER STRUCTURES – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Other Structures”
Options:
Outbuilding Apartment
Bank
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 215 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
6. Barn
7. Barn - Cattle/Dairy
8. Barn - Stable
9. Corn
10. Tobacco
11. Belmont
12. Boat House
13. Cabana/Pool House
14. Carriage House
15. Center Aisle
16. Gazebo
17. Greenhouse
18. Guest House
19. Horse Stable
20. Indoor Arena
21. Office/Studio
22. Poultry House
23. Shed (if selected, can not select Shed – Loafing, Shed – Machine, Shed – Row, Shed – Run-in, Shed – Shop or Storage Barn/Shed)
24. Shed – Loafing (if selected, can not select Shed, Shed – Machine, Shed – Row, Shed – Run-in, Shed – Shop or Storage Barn/Shed)
25. Shed - Machine (if selected, can not select Shed, Shed – Loafing, Shed – Row, Shed – Run-in, Shed – Shop or Storage Barn/Shed)
26. Shed – Row (if selected, can not select Shed, Shed – Loafing, Shed – Machine, Shed – Run-in, Shed – Shop or Storage Barn/Shed)
27. Shed - Run-in (if selected, can not select Shed, Shed – Loafing, Shed – Machine, Shed – Row, Shed – Shop or Storage Barn/Shed)
28. Shed – Shop (if selected, can not select Shed, Shed – Loafing, Shed – Machine, Shed – Row, Shed – Run-in, or Storage
Barn/Shed)
29. Storage Barn/Shed (if selected, can not select Shed, Shed – Loafing, Shed – Machine, Shed – Row, Shed – Run-in, or Shed –
Shop)
30. Tennant House
ID 3.4.8d.20. FEDERAL FLOOD ZONE – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = Yes, if Type of Rental = Vacation Rental, or Water = Yes
Field Header Text: “Federal Flood Zone? (Optional)”
Note: auto-fill from msc.fema.gov when Mandatory = Yes
User Actions
Type flood zone number
System Response
Set: Set: Listing - Contract Info - Federal Flood Zone
ID 3.4.8d.21. LOOK IT UP – BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Mandatory Field = No
Button text: “Look It Up”
User Actions
Click to open light box
System Response
Open msc.fema.gov/ in light box
When light box is closed: Set: Listing - Contract Info - Federal Flood Zone and update Federal Flood Zone field
ID 3.4.8d.22. FEDERAL FLOOD INSURANCE – RADIO BUTTON
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 216 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = Yes if Federal Flood Zone Mandatory field = Yes
Field Header Text: “Federal Flood Insurance?”
Standard Radio button options see Appendix A
User Actions
Click yes to set
System Response
Set: Listing - Contract Info - Federal Flood Insurance to Yes
ID 3.4.8d.23. FEDERAL/STATE WETLAND – RADIO BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Federal/Sate Wetland? (Optional)”
Standard Radio button options see Appendix A
User Actions
Click yes to set
System Response
Set: Listing - Contract - Federal/Sate Wetland
ID 3.4.8d.24. MINIMUM SQ FT FOR 1 STORY – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Minimum Square Feet for 1 Story Dwelling (Optional)”
Character Format:#########.##
User Actions
Type sq ft minimum
System Response
Set: Lot- Description - Minimum Square Feet for 1 Story Dwelling
ID 3.4.8d.25. MINIMUM SQ FT FOR 2+ STORY – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Minimum Square Feet for 2+ Story Dwelling (Optional)”
Character Format:#########.##
User Actions
Type sq ft minimum
System Response
Enable only if Level = Upper 1 or more
Set: Lot- Description - Minimum Square Feet for 2+ Story Dwelling
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 217 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
3/11/16 10:46 PM
R4 – Add/Update Section
Page 218 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
3.4.8c Lot/Land > Farm Essentials
Figure 28 - Lot/Land > Farm Essentials Page
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 219 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
ID 3.4.8c.1.
R4 – Add/Update Section
BREADCRUMBS – DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
Field Header Text: “Lot/Land > Farm Essentials”
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.8c.2.
FARM PROPERTY – RADIO BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “Farm Property?”
Standard radio button options - see Appendix A for details
Default = No
User Actions
Click yes to enable Farm Fields
System Response
If Farm Property = Yes then enable the following fields:
Farm Operation
Present Livestock
Number of Tenant Dwellings
Number of Silos
Total Silo Size
Main Barn Size
Tillable Acreage
Pasture Acreage
Marsh Acreage
Best Use
Potential Livestock
ID 3.4.8c.3.
FARM OPERATION – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Farm Operation”
Options:
Beef
Dairy
Feeder Operation
General
Grain
Hay
Hog
Horse
Orchard
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 220 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Pasture
Poultry
Row Crop
Truck
Vineyard
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set Lot Details Farm
ID 3.4.8c.4.
PRESENT LIVESTOCK – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Present Livestock”
Options:
Cattle
Goats
Horses
None
Pigs
Poultry
Sheep
Turkeys
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set: Property - Farm - Present Livestock
ID 3.4.8c.5.
POULTRY FARM – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Poultry Farm”
Enabled only if Farm Operation = Poultry
Options:
Alarm System
Auto Foggers
Breeders
Broilers
20,000 - 30,000
30,001- 40,000
over 40,000
Capacity - under 20,000
Cornish Hens
Foggers (all allowed)
A-Frame
Double Decker
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 221 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
17. Shed
18. Roasters
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set: Lot Details Farm Poultry Farm NEW FIELD?
ID 3.4.8c.6.
NUMBER OF TENANT DWELLINGS – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Number of Tenant Dwellings”
No character format change
User Actions
Type number
System Response
Set Property - Farm - Number of Tenant Dwellings
ID 3.4.8c.7.
NUMBER OF SILOS – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Number of Silos”
No character format change
User Actions
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Number of Silos”
No character format change
System Response
Set: Lot Details - Number of Silos
ID 3.4.8c.8.
TOTAL SILO CAPACITY – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Total Silo Capacity”
No character format change
User Actions
Type number
System Response
Set: Lot Details - Total Silos Capacity
ID 3.4.8c.9.
3/11/16 10:46 PM
MAIN BARN SIZE – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Page 222 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Main Barn Size”
No Character format change
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set
ID 3.4.8c.10. TILLABLE ACREAGE – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Tillable Acreage”
User Actions
Type number
System Response
Set: Lot Details - Tillable Acres
ID 3.4.8c.11. PASTURE ACREAGE – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Pasture Acreage”
User Actions
Type number
System Response
Set: Lot Details - Pasture Acres
ID 3.4.8c.12. MARSH ACREAGE – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Marsh Acreage”
User Actions
Type number
System Response
Set: Lot Details - Marsh Acreage
ID 3.4.8c.13. AGRICULTURAL DISTRICT – FREE FORM TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1. Mandatory Field = No
2. Field Header Text: “Agricultural District”
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 223 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
3.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Enabled only if Architectural Type = “Farm House” or “Farm House/National Folk”
User Actions
Type district
System Response
ID 3.4.8c.14. SET: PROPERTY - TAX INFO - AGRICULTURAL DISTRICTBEST USE – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Best Use”
Options:
Beef
Dairy
Feeder Operation
General Agricultural
Grain
Hay
Hog
Horse
Mixed Use
Mobile Home Park
Orchard
Pasture
Poultry
Row Crop
Subdivide 2 Acres or smaller lots
Subdivide 2-1 Acres lots
Subdivided Minimum 10 Acres
Truck
Vineyard
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set Property - Farm Lot Details - Best Use
ID 3.4.8c.15. POTENTIAL LIVESTOCK – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Potential Livestock”
Options:
Cattle
Goats
Horses
None
Other
Pigs
Poultry
Sheep
User Actions
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 224 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set: Property - Farm - Potential Livestock
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 225 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
3/11/16 10:46 PM
R4 – Add/Update Section
Page 226 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
3.4.9a Community > Essentials
Figure 29 - Community > Essentials Page
Vision Statement:
User Stories:
The user needs to…
Acceptance Criteria:
Insert Here
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 227 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
ID 3.4.9a.1.
R4 – Add/Update Section
BREADCRUMBS – DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
Field Header Text: “Community > Essentials”
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.9a.2.
HOA? – RADIO BUTTON
Description/Notes
1. Mandatory Field = Yes
2. Field Header Text: “Homeowners Association?”
3. Standard Radio button options see Appendix A
4. Auto-selected “Yes” if Financial > Fees Fee/Deposit Types = Homeowners Association
5. Hover Help: Training to Provide. Suggestion: Are there Homeowners Association Fees? Don’t forget to go the the Financial >
Fees page. Provide link to Financial > Fees page
User Actions
Click Yes if you have an Homeowners Association
System Response
Auto-selected “Yes” if Financial > Fees Fee/Deposit Types Homeowners Association is selected
Set - Property - Community HOA
ID 3.4.9a.3.
COMMUNITY POOL TYPE – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = Yes, if Homeowners Association = Yes or Type of Sale = Rental, Type of Ownership = Condo or Coop
Field Header Text: “Community Pool/Spa Types”
Same Options as Private Pool/Spa Type (location Building > Exterior Features)
User Action
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set
ID 3.4.9a.4.
AMENITIES – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Mandatory Field = No, Yes if Type of Ownership = Condo or Coop
Field Header Text: “Amenities (Optional)”
Enabled only if one or more of the following are selected from the Fees Fee/Deposit Types field:
Homeowners Association
Condo
or if Type of Ownership = Coop
or if Homeowners Association = Yes
Options:
Answering Service
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 228 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
51.
52.
53.
54.
55.
56.
57.
58.
59.
60.
61.
62.
63.
64.
65.
66.
67.
68.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Art Studio
Bar/Lounge
Baseball Field
Basketball Courts
Beach
Beauty Salon
Bike Trail
Billiard Room
Boat Ramp
Boat Slip
Bowling Alley
Club House
Community Laundry Room
Common Grounds
Community Center
Concierge
Convenience Store
Day Care
Dining Rooms
Elevator
Exercise Room
Extra Storage
Fencing
Gated Community
Golf Club
Golf Course membership available
Guest Suites
Horse Trails
Hot tub
Jog/walk Path
Lake
Library
Marina Club
Meeting Room
Mooring Area
Newspaper Service
Recreation - Non-Lake
Non-Subdivision
None
Party Room
Picnic Area
Pier/Dock
Pool Membership Available
Putting Green
Racquet Ball
Recreation Center
Retirement Community
Riding/Stables
Satellite TV
Sauna
Security
Soccer Field
Spa
Tennis Courts
Tennis-Indoor
Tot Lot(s) / Playground
Transportation Service
Volleyball Courts
Water / Lake Private
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 229 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
69. Laundry Facilities
70. Air Conditioning Unit(s)
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Set - Property - Community -> HOA/Condo/Coop Community Amenities
ID 3.4.9a.5.
RULES – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
Mandatory Field = No, Yes if Type of Ownership = Condo or Coop
Field Header Text: “Rules (Optional)”
Enabled only if: one or more of the following are selected from the Fees Fee/Deposit Types field:
Homeowners Association
Condo
or if Type of Ownership = Coop or Homeowners Association = Yes
Options:
Alter/ Architectural Changes
Antenna
Application Fee Required
Building Restoration
Commercial Vehicles Prohibited
Covenants
Credit / Board Approval
Elevator Use
Feasibility Study
Fencing
Moving Fees Required
Moving In Times
None
Parking
Pets - Allowed
Pets - Area
Pets - Cats Only
Pets - Not Allowed
Pets - Size restriction
Pets - with Application / Deposit
Recreational Equipment
Renting
Restrictions
Recreational Vehicle (RV) / Boat / Trail
Selling
Separate Land Leased
Access - above grade
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Set - Property - Community -> HOA/Condo/Coop Community Amenities
ID 3.4.9a.6.
COMMUNITY MANAGEMENT – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 230 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Community Management”
Enabled only if: one or more of the following are selected from the Fees Fee/Deposit Types field:
Homeowners Association
Condo
or if Type of Ownership = Coop or Homeowners Association = Yes
Options:
Builder / Developer – Descriptor Change
Owner / Self-Management
Professional - Off Site (if selected, can not select Professional – On Site)
Professional - On Site (if selected, can not select Professional – Off Site)
Property Lessee Association
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set Property - Community -> HOA/Condo/Coop Mgmt
ID 3.4.9a.7.
MAP PUSH PIN – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “Map Push Pin Location”
2 Fields: “Latitude” “Longitude”
Autofilled based on latitude and longitude of listing address
Location: side by side
User Actions
Type latitude and longitude
System Response
Auto-fill based on latitude and longitude of listing address
ID 3.4.9a.8.
LOOK IT UP - BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = No
Button Text: “Look it Up”
Location: Browser right of Map Push Pin
No functional change from existing Map Push Pin
User Actions
Click to open map view
System Response
Opens map view with latitude and longitude pushpin identified in light box
User can reposition pushpin for more accuracy
When closed, Latitude and Longitude are updated
ID 3.4.9a.9.
ADVERTISED COMMUNITY – TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 231 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
1.
2.
3.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “Advertised Community”
Auto-fill based on Tax/Public Records with Overwrite capability
User Actions
Type community name
System Response
Set - Property - Address - Advertised Subdivision
ID 3.4.9a.10. DIRECTIONS – LONG TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Directions (Optional)”
Maximum characters: 240
User Actions
Type directions
System Response
Set - Property Location - Directions
ID 3.4.9a.11. CHARACTER COUNTER – ACTIVE DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
Same functionality as 3.4.4c.4
User Actions
None
System Response
Same functionality a 3.4.4c.4
ID 3.4.9a.12. SPELL CHECK, THESAURUS – NAV/LINK
Description/Notes
1.
Same functionality as 3.4.4c.5
User Actions
Click to check spelling
System Response
Same functionality a 3.4.4c.5
ID 3.4.9a.13. SCHOOL INFORMATION – NAV/LINK
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text when expanded (default): “+ School Information”
Field Header Text when collapsed: “- School Information”
User Actions
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 232 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Click to expand school fields
System Response
Display/Hide following fields:
“Elementary School”
“Look it Up”
“Middle School”
“Look it Up”
“High School”
“Look it Up”
ID 3.4.9a.14. ELEMENTARY SCHOOL – TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Elementary School (Optional)”
Auto-fill based on 3rd party School Boundary plugin
User Actions
Type school name
System Response
Set - Property - Community - Elementary School
ID 3.4.9a.15. LOOK IT UP - BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Button Text: “Look it Up”
Location: Browser right of “Elementary School” field
User Actions
Click to open school boundaries in light box
System Response
Save new information on current page
Update last update in header
Opens School Boundaries in light box
Set Property - Community - Elementary School upon School Boundaries light box closes
When light box is closed, update Elementary School field
ID 3.4.9a.16. MIDDLE SCHOOL – TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Middle School (Optional)”
Same functionality as Elementary School
User Actions
Type name of school
System Response
Set - Property - Community - Middle School
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 233 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
ID 3.4.9a.17. LOOK IT UP - BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Button Text: “Look it Up”
Location: Browser right of “Middle School” field
User Actions
Click to open school boundaries in light box
System Response
Save new information on current page
Update last update in header
Opens School Boundaries in light box
Set Property - Community - Middle School upon School Boundaries light box closes
When light box is closed, update Middle School field
ID 3.4.9a.18. HIGH SCHOOL – TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “High School (Optional)”
Same functionality as Elementary School
User Actions
Type school name
System Response
Set - Property - Community - High School
ID 3.4.9a.19. LOOK IT UP - BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Button Text: “Look it Up”
Location: Browser right of “High School” field
User Actions
Click to open school boundaries in light box
System Response
Save new information on current page
Update last update in header
Opens School Boundaries in light box
Set Property - Community - High School upon School Boundaries light box closes
When light box is closed, update High School field
ID 3.4.9a.20. OTHER INFORMATION – NAV/LINK
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text when expanded: “+ Other Information”
Field Header Text when collapsed (default): “- Other Information”
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 234 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
User Actions
Click to view other information fields
System Response
Display/Hide the following fields:
“Election District (Optional)”
”ADC Map Book”
”Section”
”Lot”
”Block”
”Phase”
”Parcel”
”Tax Map Number”
”Liber Number”
ID 3.4.9a.20a.1.
ELECTION DISTRICT – TEXT BOX, NOT SHOWN
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Election District (Optional)”
Auto-Fill from tax records
Overwrite capability
User Actions
Type district number
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set - ?
ID 3.4.9a.20a.2.
ADC MAP BOOK – TEXT BOX, NOT SHOWN
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “ADC Map Book Coordinates”
Overwrite capability
User Actions
Type map coordinates, if known from ADC map
System Response
Set Property Location - ADC Map Book Coordinate
ID 3.4.9a.20a.3.
LOOK IT UP – BUTTON, NOT SHOWN
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Mandatory Field = No
Button text: “Look It Up”
User Actions
Click to open myADCMaps.com in light box
System Response
Save new information on current page
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 235 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Update “Last Update” in Header
Open myADCMaps.com in light box
Set Property Location - ADC Map Book Coordinate when light box is closed
When light box closes, update field
ID 3.4.9a.20a.4.
SECTION – TEXT BOX, NOT SHOWN
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Section (Optional)”
Auto-fill from tax records with overwrite capability
User Actions
Type number to overwrite auto-fill from tax record
System Response
Auto-fill from tax records
Set - Property Location - Section
ID 3.4.9a.20a.5.
LOT – TEXT BOX, NOT SHOWN
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “Lot”
Auto-fill from tax records with overwrite capability
User Actions
Type number to overwrite auto-fill from tax record
System Response
Auto-fill from tax records
Set - Property Location - Lot
ID 3.4.9a.20a.6.
BLOCK – TEXT BOX, NOT SHOWN
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Block (Optional)”
Auto-fill from tax records with overwrite capability
User Actions
Type number to overwrite auto-fill from tax record
System Response
Auto-fill from tax records
Set - Property Location - Block / Square
ID 3.4.9a.20a.7.
PHASE – TEXT BOX, NOT SHOWN
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Phase (Optional)”
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 236 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
User Actions
Type number to overwrite auto-fill from tax record
System Response
Auto-fill from tax records
Set - Property Location - Phase
ID 3.4.9a.20a.8.
PARCEL NUMBER – NUMBER TEXT BOX, NOT SHOWN
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Parcel Number (Optional)”
User Actions
Type number
System Response
Set - Property Location - Parcel Number
ID 3.4.9a.20a.9.
TAX MAP NUMBER – NUMBER TEXT BOX, NOT SHOWN
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Tax Map Number (Optional)”
User Actions
Type number
System Response
Set - Property Location - Tax Map Number
ID 3.4.9a.20a.10.
LIBER NUMBER – NUMBER TEXT BOX, NOT SHOWN
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Liber Number (Optional)”
User Actions
Type number
System Response
Set - Property Location - Liber Number
ID 3.4.9a.20a.11.
FOLIO NUMBER – NUMBER TEXT BOX, NOT SHOWN
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Folio Number (Optional)”
User Actions
Type number
System Response
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 237 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Set - Property Location - Folio Number
ID 3.4.9a.20a.12.
HISTORIC DESIGNATION ID – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Historic Designation ID(Optional)”
Enabled only if Disclosures = Historic Property
Auto-fill from Public Records, if available, with overwrite capability
User Actions
Type number
System Response
Set - Listing - Contract Info - Historic Designation ID
If Historic Designation ID set, Set Historic = Yes
ID 3.4.9a.20a.13.
LOCAL HISTORIC DISTRICT – TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Local Historic District (Optional)”
Enabled only if Disclosures = Historic Property
Auto-fill from Public Records, if available, with overwrite capability
User Actions
Type Disctric Name
System Response
Set – General - Local Historical District
If Local Historical District Set, set Historic = Yes
ID 3.4.9a.20a.14.
LOCAL HISTORIC DISTRICT WEBSITE – URL TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Local Historic District Website (Optional)”
Enabled only if Disclosures = Historic Property
Auto-fill from Public Records, if available, with overwrite capability
User Actions
Type Disctric Website
System Response
Set – General - Local Historical District URL
ID 3.4.9a.20a.15.
LOOK IT UP - BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Button Text: “Look It Up”
Enabled only if Disclosures = Historic Property
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 238 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
User Actions
Click to open new browser window
System Response
When browser window is closed set url to General - Local Historical District URL
ID 3.4.9a.20a.16.
NATIONAL HISTORIC DISTRICT –TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “National Historic District (Optional)”
Enabled only if Disclosures = Historic Property
Auto-fill from Public Records, if available, with overwrite capability
User Actions
Type District Website
System Response
Set – General - National Historic District
If Nation Historic Distoric District is set, Set Historic = Yes
ID 3.4.9a.20a.17.
NATIONAL HISTORIC DISTRICT URL – TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “National Historic District URL (Optional)”
Enabled only if Disclosures = Historic Property
Auto-fill from Public Records, if available, with overwrite capability
User Actions
Type District Website
System Response
Set – General - National Historic District URL
ID 3.4.9a.20a.18.
LOOK IT UP - BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Button Text: “Look It Up”
Enabled only if Disclosures = Historic Property
User Actions
Click to open new browser window
System Response
When browser window is closed set url to General - National Historic District URL
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 239 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
3.4.9b Community > Car Optional
Figure 30 - Community > Car Optional Page
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 240 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
ID 3.4.9b.1.
R4 – Add/Update Section
BREADCRUMBS – DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
Page Title: “Community > Car Optional”
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.9b.2.
NEIGHBORHOOD/SUBDIVISION – TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Neighborhood/Subdivision”
Auto-fill based on Tax Records
Overwrite capability
User Actions
Type neighborhood
System Response
Set Subdivision field
See MasterTaxoNomy_Final.xls for details
ID 3.4.9b.3.
WALK SCORE – DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Field Header Text: “Walk Score”
Field Shows Walk Score
User is unable to change
User Actions
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.9b.4.
NEARBY ACTIVITIES – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Nearby Activities”
Options:
Public Transportation
Shopping
Parks
Restaurants
Shopping
Entertainment
Enables Associated Selected Fields
For Example: If Park is selected, enable only 3.4 9b.9 - 10. If all “Nearby Activities” are selected, enable all fields.
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 241 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Enable associated fields (IDs ??)
Set
ID 3.4.9b.5.
PUBLIC TRANSPORTATION NAME – TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Enabled only if selected in 3.4.9b.4.
Field Header Text: “Public Transportation Name”
User Actions
Type or Autofill (if using Walk Score API)
System Response
Opens Walk Score API - see ID 3.4.9b.15 for details
Set ? – NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.9b.6.
DISTANCE TO PUBLIC TRANSPORTATION – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory field = No
Field Header Text: “Distance to Public Transportation (Optional)”
Enabled only if selected in 3.4.9b.4
Standard Distance Options – see Appendix A for details
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set NEW FIELD Communities Car Optional
ID 3.4.9b.7.
Distance to (Named Metro Stop)
SHOPPING NAME – TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Shopping Name”
Enabled if selected in 3.4.9b.4
User Actions
Type or Autofill (if using Walk Score API)
System Response
Opens Walk Score API - see ID 3.4.9b.15 for details
Set ? – NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.9b.8.
3/11/16 10:46 PM
DISTANCE TO SHOPPING – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Page 242 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory field = No
Field Header Text: “Distance to Shopping (Optional)”
Enabled only if selected in 3.4.9b.4
Standard Distance Options – see Appendix A for details
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set Distance to (Named Shopping Area) – NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.9b.9.
PARK NAME – TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Park Name”
Enabled if selected in 3.4.9b.4
User Actions
Type or Autofill (if using Walk Score API)
System Response
Opens Walk Score API - see ID 3.4.9b.15 for details
Set ? – NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.9b.10. DISTANCE TO PARK – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory field = No
Field Header Text: “Distance to Park (Optional)”
Enabled only if selected in 3.4.9b.4
Standard Distance Options – see Appendix A for details
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set NEW FIELD Communities Car Optional
Distance to (Named Park)
ID 3.4.9b.11. RESTAURANT NAME – TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Restaurant Name”
Enabled if selected in 3.4.9b.4
User Actions
Type or Autofill (if using Walk Score API)
System Response
Opens Walk Score API - see ID 3.4.9b.15 for details
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 243 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Set ? – NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.9b.12. DISTANCE TO RESTAURANT – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory field = No
Field Header Text: “Distance to Restaurant (Optional)”
Enabled only if selected in 3.4.9b.4
Standard Distance Options – see Appendix A for details
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set ? – NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.9b.13. ENTERTAINMENT NAME – TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Entertainment Name”
Enabled if selected in 3.4.9b.4
User Actions
Type or Autofill (if using Walk Score API)
System Response
Opens Walk Score API - see ID 3.4.9b.15 for details
Set ? – NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.9b.14. DISTANCE TO ENTERTAINMENT – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory field = No
Field Header Text: “Distance to Entertainment (Optional)”
Enabled only if selected in 3.4.9b.4
Standard Distance Options – see Appendix A for details
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set Distance to (Named Entertainment/Theatre) – NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.9b.15. WALK SCORE - API
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Displays selected information, distance and map points.
For example: If “Park Information” is selected “Parks” would display in the following order:
Left Column
Standard functionality to Walk Score API
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 244 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
5. Closest Park to Farthest (up to 8)
6. Distance (from Listing Address)
7. New functionality to Walk Score API - Radio button (for selection)
8. Display one Radio button for each Item Listed
9. When Radio button one item selected Display Item name and distance in Selected field on Page
10. If more than one item is selected, display closest Item name and distance in Selected Field and remaining Items name and
distances below Selected field on Page.
11. For Example: When all radio buttons are items are selected in the Walk Score API for “Parks,” “Cabin Branch Park” and “.6mi” is
displayed in “Park Information” free form text box, “Center way Park” “.6mi”
12. Strawberry Knoll Park” “1.2mi”
13. “Green Valley Conservation Park” “1.4mi”
14. “Goshen Branch” “1.7mi”
15. “Flower Hill Park” “1.8mi”
16. “North Germantown Special Park” “2.1mi”
17. “Plumgar Park” “2.2mi”
18. are displayed below “Park Information” in a two column table format
19. Right Column – Map – no functional change
20. Map Points with Rollover Name of Place
21. Buttons
22. Button 1 Text: “Accept All” (Activity Name)
23. Button 1 Action: Display ALL item names and distances in Selected Field on Page Closest Item displayed in Selected Field,
remaining item names and distances to be displayed in a two column format
24. Button 2 Text: “Add My Own”
25. Button 2 Action: Walk Score API closes, Free form text box enabled
26. Button 3 Text: “Done”
27. Button 3 Action: Close Walk Score API
User Actions
Click to radio buttons to add name and distance to selected activity
System Response
Display selected Item name and distance
ID 3.4.9b.16. ACCEPT ALL - BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Mandatory Field = No
Button Text: “Accept All”
User Actions
Click to add all Walk Score information for all selected activities
System Response
All Items from Walk Score API for all Fields, Public Transportation, Shopping, Park, Restaurant, and Entertainment are displayed
ID 3.4.9b.17. IGNORE ALL - BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Mandatory Field = No
Button Text: “Ignore All”
Walk Score API is Not opened for the following free form text fields:
Public Transportation Information
Shopping Information
Park Information
Restaurant Information
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 245 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
8.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Entertainment Information
User Actions
Click to Not use Walk Score information
System Response
All information from Walk Score is Not used
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 246 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
3/11/16 10:46 PM
R4 – Add/Update Section
Page 247 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
3.4.9c Community > Sr. Living
Figure 31 - Community > Sr. Living
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 248 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
ID 3.4.9c.1.
R4 – Add/Update Section
BREADCRUMBS
Description/Notes
1.
Field Header Text: “Community > Sr. Living”
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.9c.2.
TYPE OF COMMUNITY – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “Type of Community”
Options:
Full Service Retirement
62+ Active Adult Community
55+ Active Adult Community
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Enables the following fields:
Name of Care Center
Services Offered
Activities Offered
Website
ID 3.4.9c.3.
NAME OF CARE CENTER/COMMUNITY – TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Name of Care Center or Community”
Enabled only if Type of Commmunity is selected
User Actions
Type name of community
System Response
Set Sr Living Oriented Care Center Name -NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.9c.4.
SERVICES OFFERED – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Enabled only if Type of Community is selected
Field Header Text: “Services Offered”
Options: if Type of Community = 55+ Active Adult Community or 62+ Active Adult Community
Beauty/Barber
Bank
Convenience Store
Gift Shop
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 249 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Laundry
Massage
Mail Service
Options: if Type of Community = Full Service Retirement + Options: for 55+ Active Adult Community (display for all?)
Independent Living
Assisted Living
Hospice Relations
Short Term Stays
Restorative Care
Nursing Care
Respite Care
Transportation
Alzheimer/Parkinson’s Unit
Pharmacy Services
Physical therapy
Laboratory Services
Occupation Therapy
Speech therapy
X-ray
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set Sr Living Oriented - Services Offered -- NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.9c.5.
ACTIVITIES OFFERED – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header: “Activities Offered”
Enabled only if Type of Community is selected
Options:
Tennis
Golf
Library
Game Room
Pet-Friendly
Cultural Activities
Religious Activities
Movie Lounge
Horseshoes
Shuffleboard
Computer Center
Art Studio
Bocce Ball
Wood Shop
Hot Tub
Classrooms
Auditorium
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 250 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Expand drop down box
Set Sr Living Oriented - Activities Offered -- NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.9c.6.
WEBSITE – URL TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Care Center/Community Website”
Enabled only if Type of Community is selected
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set Care Center Web URL -- NEW FIELD
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 251 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
3.4.9d Community > Golf/Tennis
Figure 32 - Community > Golf/Tennis Page
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 252 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
ID 3.4.9d.1.
R4 – Add/Update Section
BREADCRUMBS
Description/Notes
1.
Field Header Text: “Community > Golf/Tennis”
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.9d.2.
TYPE OF CLUB – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Type of Club”
Options:
Golf
Tennis
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Enables fields 3.4.9d.3 - 5
If “Golf” is selected enable 3.4.9d.6
If “Tennis” is selected enable 3.4.9d.7
Set Communities Golf/Tennis Club Name - NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.9d.3.
NAME OF CLUB – TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = Yes, if Type of Club is selected
Enabled only Type of Club is selected
Field Header Text: “Name of Club”
User Actions
Type name of club
System Response
Set Communities Golf/Tennis Club Name - NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.9d.4.
DISTANCE TO CLUB – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Enabled only if Type of Club is selected
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Distance to Club (Optional)”
Standard Distance Options – see Appendix A for details
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 253 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set ?
ID 3.4.9d.5.
MEMBERSHIP INFO – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Membership Info”
Enabled only if Type of Club is selected
Options:
Included
Available
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set Communities Golf/Tennis Membership - NEW FIELD -
ID 3.4.9d.6.
GOLF AMENITIES – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Golf Amenities (Optional)”
Enabled only if Type of Club =“Golf”
Sorted by system most selected, Alphabetical until system has enough metrics
Options:
Clubhouse
View of Course
Near Tee Box
On/Near Fairway
On/Near Green
Golf Pro
Private Carts Allowed
18 Holes
9 Holes
27 Holes
36 Holes
Executive
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set Communities Golf/Tennis Golf Amenities - NEW FIELD -
ID 3.4.9d.7.
TENNIS AMENITIES – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1. Mandatory Field = No
2. Field Header Text: “Tennis Amenities”
3. Enabled only if Type of Club = “Tennis”
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 254 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Options:
Lighted Courts
Up to 4 Courts
5-12 Courts
Over 12 Courts
Grass
Clay
Synthetic
Concrete
Tennis Pro
Clubhouse
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set Communities Golf/Tennis Tennis Amenities - NEW FIELD -
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 255 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
3.4.9e Community > Water Oriented
Figure 33 - Community > Water Oriented Page
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 256 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
ID 3.4.9e.1.
R4 – Add/Update Section
BREADCRUMBS –DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
Field Header Text: “Community > Water Oriented”
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.9e.2.
WATER – RADIO BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Field = Header Text: “Water Oriented?”
Standard radio button options – see Appendix A for details
User Action
Click yes if listing is near a water community
System Response
Enables IDs 3.4.9e.3 - 9
If selected, Water = Yes the follow fields are mandatory:
Type of Body of Water
Name of Body of Water
Distance to Water
View Accessibility
Navigable Water
Mean Low Water
Type of Use
Number of Docks
If selected from Yes to No, disable fields 3.4.9e.3-12 have been set, hide content
ID 3.4.9e.3.
TYPE OF BODY WATER – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Mandatory Field = Yes, if Water = Yes
Field Header text: “Type of Body of Water”
Options:
Lake
Bay
Creek/Stream
Ocean
River
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Sets Type of Body of Water - New Field
ID 3.4.9e.4.
3/11/16 10:46 PM
NAME OF BODY OF WATER – TEXT BOX
Page 257 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = Yes, if Water = Yes
Field Header Text: “Name of Body of Water”
Enabled only if Type of Body of Water is selected.
User Actions
Type name of body of water
System Response
Set Name of Body of Water
ID 3.4.9e.5.
RIPARIAN RIGHTS – RADIO BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Riparian Rights Convey (Optional)”
Enabled only if Type of Body of Water is selected.
Standard Radio button options see Appendix A for details.
Hep Tips: Training Department to provide.
User Actions
Click Yes if riparian right transfer with new owner
System Response
Set Riparian Rights
ID 3.4.9e.6.
DISTANCE TO WATER – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = Yes, if Water = Yes
Field Header Text: “Distance to Body of Water”
Enabled only if Type of Body of Water is selected.
Standard Distance Options see Appendix A for details
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set Distance to Body of Water
ID 3.4.9e.7.
VIEW ACCESSIBILITY – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Mandatory Field = Yes, if Water = Yes
Field header text: “Water View Accessibility”
Enabled only if Type of Body of Water is selected.
Options:
Water Access
Water Front
Water View
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 258 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
System Response
Expand drop down box
If View Accessibility = Water Front, enable Water Frontage
Set Lot - Description - View/Access
ID 3.4.9e.8.
WATER FRONTAGE – NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = Yes, if Water View Accessibilty = Water Front
Field Header Text: “Water Frontage (in Feet)”
Location: Browser right of View Accessibility
Enabled only if View Accessibility = Water Front
User Action
Type number of feet of Water Frontage
System Response
Set Water Frontage
ID 3.4.9e.9.
NAVIGABLE WATER – RADIO BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = Yes, if Water = Yes
Field Header Text: “Navigable Water?”
Enabled only if Type of Body of Water is selected.
Standard Radio button options see Appendix A
User Actions
Click Yes if water if navigable
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set Navigable Water
ID 3.4.9e.10. MEAN LOW WATER – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Mandatory Field = Yes, if Water = Yes
Field Header Text: “Mean Low Water - in Feet”
Sub-Text: “Choose Lowest Level”
Enabled only Type of Body of Water is selected.
Options:
0+
1+
2+
3+
4+
5+
6+
8+
Hep Tips: Training to provide. Suggestion, possible images to show definition, similar to Architectural Style.
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 259 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set Water - Mean Low Water
ID 3.4.9e.11. TYPES OF USE – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1. Mandatory Field = Yes, if Water = Yes
2. Field Header Text: “Types of Use”
3. Enabled only if Type of Body of Water is selected.
4. Options:
5. Boat - Non Powered Only – Descriptor Change (if selected, can not select, Boat – Powered, Under 40hp Motor Only, Boat –
Eletric Only)
6. Boat – Powered – Descriptor Change (if selected, can not select Boat – Non Powered Only, Under 40hp Motor Only or Boat –
Electric Motor Only)
7. Under 40hp Motor Only (if selected can not select Boat – Non Powered Only, Boat – Powered, Boat – Electric Motor Only)
8. Boat - Electric Motor Only
9. Sail
10. Waterski/Wakeboard
11. Personal Watercraft (PWC) (if selected, can not select, No Personal Watercraft)
12. No Personal Watercraft – New Descriptor (if selected, can not select, Personal Water Watercraft)
13. Canoe/Kayak
14. Float – New Descriptor
15. Beach – New Descriptor
16. Swim (if selected, can not select, No Swim)
17. No Swim (if selected, can not select Swim)
18. Fish – New Descriptor
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set Water Oriented Types of Use – NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.9e.12. NUMBER OF DOCKS – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Mandatory Field = Yes, if Water = Yes
Field header text: “Number of Docks”
Enabled only if Type of Body of Water is selected.
Options:
0
1
2
3
4
5+
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
If selected enable fields 3.4.9e.11, 3.4.9e.12 & 3.4.9e.13
Set Water - # of Docks
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 260 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
ID 3.4.9e.13. DOCK FEATURES – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Mandatory Field = Yes, if Water = Yes and Number of Docks is selected
Field header text: “Dock Features and Improvements”
Enabled only if Number of Docks is selected.
Options:
Against Bulkhead
Mooring
Multiple Slip (if selected, can not select Single Slip)
None
Other
Pier
Ramp
Single Slip (if selected, can not select Multiple Slip)
Swim Only
Type A
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set Property - Water -> Dock Type - Dock Type
ID 3.4.9e.14. NUMBER OF SLIPS – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Mandatory Field = Yes, if Water = Yes and Number of Docks is selected
Field Header Text: “Number of Slips”
Enabled only if Type of Body of Water and Number of Docks are selected.
Options:
0
1
2
3
4
5+
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set ? – NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.9e.15. OWNERSHIP CONVEYS – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Mandatory Field = Yes, if Water = Yes and if Number of Slips is selected
Field Header Text: “Ownership Physical Dock/Slip Conveys”
Enabled only if Type of Body of Water and Number of Docks are selected
Options:
Assumable Lease
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 261 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
6.
7.
8.
9.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Available by Lease
Deeded
First Come/First Served
Waiting List
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set ? – NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.9e.16. ADD ANOTHER BODY – NAV/LINK
Description/Notes
1.
Field Header Text: “+ Add Another Body of Water”
User Actions
Click to add another body of water
System Response
Save new information on current form
Clear form
Update “Last Update” in Header
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 262 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
3/11/16 10:46 PM
R4 – Add/Update Section
Page 263 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
3.4.9f Community > Outdoor Recreation
Figure 34 - Community > Outdoor Recreation Page
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 264 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
ID 3.4.9f.1.
R4 – Add/Update Section
BREADCRUMBS – DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
Field Header Text: “Community > Outdoor Recreation”
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.9f.2.
TYPE OF ACTIVITY – MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “Type of Activity”
Sort by system 10 most selected with “more” to view all, alphabetical until system has metrics
Options:
Hunting
Mountain Bike
Hiking
Camping
Skiing
Ski-in/Ski-out
Fishing
Ski-in/Ski-out
Ski Near-by
Adjacent to National Park
Adjacent to State/County Park
Bike/Walking Trails
Backs to Parkland
Backs to Trees
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Enables 3.4.9f.4 – 5
If Type of Activity = Other enable 3.4.9f.3
Set Communities Outdoor Recreation Types of Use - NEW FIELD Set
ID 3.4.9f.3.
OTHER TYPE OF ACTIVITY – TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1. Mandatory Field = No
2. Field Header Text: “Other Type of Activity”
3. Enabled only if “Other” in Type of Activity is selected
Location: Browser right of Type of Activity
User Actions
Type “other” type of activity, Not found in single select drop down box
System Response
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 265 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Set Communities Outdoor Recreation Types of Use - NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.9f.4.
NAME OF RECREATION AREA – TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
4.
5.
6.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Name of Recreation Area”
Enabled only if Type of Activity is selected
User Actions
Type name of area
System Response
Set Communities Outdoor Recreation Park/Forest Name - New Field
ID 3.4.9f.5.
DISTANCE TO AREA – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Distance to Area”
Enabled only if Type of Activity is selected
Standard Distance Options – see Appendix A for details
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set Communities Outdoor Recreation Distance to (next free form field) - NEW FIELD -
ID 3.4.9f.6.
ADD ANOTHER RECREATION AREA – NAV/LINK
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Add Another Recreation Area”
Enabled only if Type of Activity is selected
User Actions
Click to add another area
System Response
Save current information on form
Clear form
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 266 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
3.4.10a Quick Entry > Mandatory Template
Vision Statement:
The Mandatory Quick Entry Template showcases all of the fields required to enter a property. The goal of this template (and all
templates) is to provide a short cut for the user and the method that all essential fields have been completed.
User Stories:
The user needs to…
Acceptance Criteria:
Insert Here
ID 3.4.10a.1. BREADCRUMBS – DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Field Header Text: “Quick Entry > Mandatory Template”
All Fields Mandatory = Yes
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.10a.2. MANDATORY FIELDS - VARIOUS
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Where Mandatory Field = Yes, display in following tab order:
Listing
Promotions
Financial
Building
Lot/Land
Community
See master taxonomy.xls Mandatory List tab for complete and updated Mandatory Field list
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 267 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
3.4.10b Quick Entry > Amenities Template
Figure 35 – Quick Entry > Amenities Template
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 268 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
ID 3.4.10b.1. BREADCRUMBS – DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1. Field Description Text: “Quick Entry > Amenities Template”
2. All Fields Mandatory = No
3. Standard for all check boxes:
4. Checked if already selected on Building > Interior Essentials page
5. If an Option is repeated in multiple Sections and is checked, (for example: Wall-To-Wall in Flooring for Bedroom 1) all Options
should be checked, but if that Option is unchecked do not update throughout
6. See master taxonomy.xls TAGS column for complete and updated list
7. Displayed alphabetically
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.10b.2.
EXPLANATORY - DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Line 1: “Did you miss anything?”
Line 2: “Here are some last minute checks to complete your listing.”
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.10b.3.
LEVEL SELECTED - DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Field Header Text: Level Selected on Building > Interior Essentials page in following order:
Main Level
Upper 1 Level
Upper 2 Level
Attic Level
Lower 1 Level
Lower 2 Level
Basement Level
If no Level selected provide link to Building > Interior Essentials page
User Action
None
System Response
If no Level selected provide link to Building > Interior Essentials page
Display Building > Interior Essentials page
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 269 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
ID 3.4.10b.4.
PHOTO
R4 – Add/Update Section
ROOM NAME (IN ORDER OF SELECTION BY LEVEL) - DISPLAY NAME AND
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Field Header Text: Room Name selected on Building > Interior Essentials
Photo as chosen on Building > Interior Essentials or Media Connect
Photo magnifies with MouseOver
If no rooms have been selected provide link to Building > Interior Essentials
User Action
Mouse over photo to magnify
System Response
Magnify photo
ID 3.4.10b.5.
ROOM TYPE AMENITY - CHECK BOX
Description/Notes
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Field Header Text: Amenity Field Name
Room Type Options:
Checked if selected in editing process
Unchecked if not selected in edited
If no Room Type Amenity only display 2nd and 3rd column
User Action
Check appropriate amenities for each room
System Response
Set amenties for each room
Repeat for each selected room on Building > Interior Essentials
See master taxonomy.xls TAGS column for complete list of Amenities
If Room Details have not been entered, provide link to Building > Interior Essentials
For example: Kitchen is 1st room selected on Building > Interior Essentials. Therefore, Kitchen is the “1st Room” displayed with photo
selected. Kitchen Amenities are displayed with check box. If amenity has already been selected on Building > Room Detail page, check box
is checked.
ID 3.4.10b.6.
FLOORING - CHECK BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Flooring Field Header Text: “Flooring”
Display for each room displayed
Flooring Options:
Wall-To-Wall Carpeting
Wood Floors
Location: Browser right of Room Type Options
User Action
Check appropriate flooring for each room
System Response
Set flooring – see standard functionality, in Breadcrumbs 3.4.10b.1 for details
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 270 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
ID 3.4.10b.7.
R4 – Add/Update Section
WINDOWS - CHECK BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Window Field Header Text: “Windows”
Display for each room displayed
Windows Options:
Drapery Rods
Drapes/Curtains
Shades/Blinds
Location: Browser right of Flooring Options
User Action
Check appropriate windows for each room
System Response
Set windows – see functionality, in Breadcrums, 3.4.10b.1 for details
ID 3.4.10b.8.
WALLS - CHECK BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Walls Field Header Text: “Walls”
Display for each room displayed
Walls Options:
Chair Railing
Crown Molding
Wainscoting
Location: Below Window Options
User Action
Check appropriate walls for each room
System Response
Set walls, see functionality, in Breadcrumbs, 3.4.10b.1 for details
ID 3.4.10b.9.
FIREPLACE - CHECK BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Fireplace Field Header Text: “Fireplace”
Fireplace Options:
Gas Insert
Heatilator
Wood Stove Insert
Location: Browser right of Windows Options
Only display if Fireplace = Yes
User Action
Check appropriate fireplace amenities
System Response
Set fireplace amenities
ID 3.4.10b.10.
3/11/16 10:46 PM
BUILT-IN AND CUSTOMIZATION - CHECK BOX
Page 271 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Field Header Text: “Built-In and Customizations”
Standard functionality, see Breadcrumbs, 3.4.10b.1 for details
Options:
Above Ground Jacuzzi
Built-in Bookcases
Built-in China Cabinet
Cedar Closet
Ceiling Fan Conveys
Curved Staircase
Double/Dual Staircase
Elevator
Furniture Conveys
Multiple Ceiling Fans
Water Closet
Wet Bar/Bar
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 272 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
3/11/16 10:46 PM
R4 – Add/Update Section
Page 273 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
3.4.10c Quick Entry > Eco-Friendly Template
Figure 36 - Summary > Eco-Friendly Template
ID 3.4.10c.1.
BREADCRUMBS – DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Field Header Text: “Summary > Eco-Friendly Template”
All Fields Mandatory = No
Standard for all check boxes:
Checked if already selected on Building > Interior Essentials page
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 274 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
5. If an Option is repeated in multiple Sections and is checked, (for example: Geo-Thermal in Cooling and Heating) both Options
should be checked
6. See master taxonomy.xls TAGS column for complete and updated list
7. Displayed alphabetically
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.10c.2.
INTRODUCTION - DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Line 1: “Did you miss anything?”
Line 2: “Here are some last minute checks to complete your listing.”
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.10c.3.
FLOORING - CHECK BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Field Header Text: “Flooring”
Options:
Bamboo
Other
User Action
Same functionality as Amenities flooring
System Response
Same functionality as Amenities flooring
ID 3.4.10c.4.
WINDOWS - CHECK BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Field Header Text: “Windows”
Options:
EnergyStar
Low-E
Triple Pane
User Action
Same functionality as Windows on Amenity page
System Response
Same functionality as Windows on Amenity page
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 275 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
ID 3.4.10c.5.
R4 – Add/Update Section
KITCHEN - CHECK BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Field Header Text: “Kitchen”
Sub Heading Text: “Appliances”
Options:
Energy Star Appliances
Instant Hot Water
Sub Heading Text: “Countertops”
PaperStone
Recycled Content
SileStone
User Action
Same functionality as Room Type check box on Amenity page
System Response
Same functionality as Room Type check box on Amenity page
ID 3.4.10c.6.
BATHROOM - CHECK BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Field header text: “Bathroom”
Sub Heading Text: “Toilets”
Options:
Dual Flush
High Efficiency
Sub Heading Text: “Countertops”
Options:
PaperStone
Recycled Content
SileStone
User Action
Same functionality as Room Type check box on Amenity page
System Response
Same functionality as Room Type check box on Amenity page
ID 3.4.10c.7.
COOLING - CHECK BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Field Header Text: “System and Utilities”
Sub Header Text: “Cooling System”
Options:
Ceiling Fan(s)
Energy Star Colling System
Programmable Thermostat
Solar - Active/Passive
Solar - Off Grid
Solar - On Grid
Solar - Roughed-in
Solar Attic Fan
Geothermal Heat Pump
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 276 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Sub Header Text: “Cooling Fuel”
Options:
Geo-Thermal
Solar - Photovoltaic
Wind Turbine/Power
User Action
Same functionality as Room Type check box on Amenity page
System Response
Same functionality as Room Type check box on Amenity page
ID 3.4.10c.8.
HEATING - CHECK BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Field Header Text: “Heating System and Health Conservation”
Options:
Fresh Air Recovery System
Geo-Thermal
Geo-Thermal Heat Pump
Programmable Thermostat
Radiant
Solar
Solar - Off Grid
Solar - On Grid
Solar - Roughed-in
Location: Browser right of Cooling
User Action
Same functionality as Room Type check box on Amenity page
System Response
Same functionality as Room Type check box on Amenity page
ID 3.4.10c.9.
WATER - CHECK BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Field Header Text: “Water System”
Options:
Grey Water
Instant Hot Water
Rainwater Harvesting
Solar
Location: Browser right of Heating
User Action
Same functionality as Room Type check box on Amenity page
System Response
Same functionality as Room Type check box on Amenity page
ID 3.4.10c.10.
3/11/16 10:46 PM
EXTERIOR CONSTRUCTION - CHECK BOX
Page 277 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Field Header Text: “Exterior Construction”
Options:
Structural Insulated Panel System SIPS
Trombe Wall
User Action
Same functionality as Room Type check box on Amenity page
System Response
Same functionality as Room Type check box on Amenity page
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 278 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
3.4.10d Quick Entry > Top Searched Template
insert graphic and caption
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 279 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
ID 3.4.10d.1. BREADCRUMBS – DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Field Header Text: “Summary > Top Searched Template”
Same functionality as Amenities
See master taxonomy.xls for Top Searched fields, To be identified by Tim Campbell
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 280 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
3.4.10e Quick Entry > Short Term Rental Template
Figure 37 - Quick Entry > Short Term Rental Template Page
ID 3.4.10e.1.
BREADCRUMBS – DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Field Header Text: “Summary > Short Term Rental Template”
All Fields Mandatory = Yes
User Action
None
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 281 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
System Response
None
ID 3.4.10e.2.
WEEKLY RENT - NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Field Header Text: “Weekly Rent”
Character Format: $#,###,###.##
User Action
Type weekly rent
System Response
Set NEW Summary Templates
ID 3.4.10e.3.
Rent Modified
Weekly Rent
TOTAL SQ FOOTAGE - NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Field Header Text: “Total Sq Footage”
Character Format: #,###
User Action
Type total square footage
System Response
Set NEW Summary Templates
ID 3.4.10e.4.
Rent Modified
Total Square Feet
ONLINE REGISTRATION AVAILABLE - RADIO BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
Standard Radio Button Options - see Appendix A for details
User Action
Click yes to setp online registration
System Response
Set ?
ID 3.4.10e.5.
REGISTRATION SITE - URL TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
Field Header Text: “Registration Site”
User Action
Type/copy url of registration site
System Response
Set NEW Summary Templates
ID 3.4.10e.6.
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Rent Modified
Property URL
LOOK IT UP - BUTTON
Page 282 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Description/Notes
2.
3.
4.
Button Text: “Look It Up”
Opens new browser window
Copy URL in Registration Site Text box
User Action
Click to open new window to browse to registration site
System Response
Open new window
When new window closes, copy URL in Registration Site text box
ID 3.4.10e.7.
NUMBER OF BEDROOMS - NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Field Header Text: “Number of Bedrooms”
Character Format: ##
User Action
Type number of bedrooms
System Response
Set NEW Summary Templates
ID 3.4.10e.8.
Rent Modified
Number of Bedrooms
MAXIMUM OCCUPANCY - NUMBER TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Field Header Text: “Maximum Occupancy (Sleeps)”
Character Format: ###
User Action
Type maximum occupancy number
System Response
Set NEW Summary Templates
ID 3.4.10e.9.
Rent Modified
Maximum Occupancy (Sleeps)
RENT INCLUDES - MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Field Header Text: “Rent Includes”
Options:
Maid Service/Linen
Parking
Golf
Tennis
Pool Heated
Dock Fees
Boat/Personal Watercraft
User Action
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 283 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
Expand drop down box
Set NEW Summary Templates
ID 3.4.10e.10.
Rent Modified
R4 – Add/Update Section
Rent Includes
AVAILABLE FOR FEES - MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Field Header Text: “Available for Fees”
Options:
Dock Fees
Pool Heated
Golf
Tennis
Parking
Maid Service/Linen
Boat/Personal Watercraft
User Action
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set NEW Summary Templates
ID 3.4.10e.11.
Rent Modified
Available for Fee
SPECIAL AMENITIES - MULTI SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Field Header Text: “Special Amenities”
Options:
Free Internet
Wi-Fi
Tennis Privileges
Pool - Community
Pool - Private
Grill - Community
Grill - Private
Large Screen HD TV
Cable Satellite
Whirlpool/Hot Tub - Community
Whirlpool/Hot Tub - Private
Pet Friendly
Sleeps 8+
Sun Deck/Patio
Ocean Access
Dock Access
User Action
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set NEW Summary Templates
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Rent Modified
Special Amenities
Page 284 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
3/11/16 10:46 PM
R4 – Add/Update Section
Page 285 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
3.4.11a New Features – MRISAssist: Step 1. Search for a Listing
Figure 38 - Search for a Listing
Vision Statement:
Note: A working prototype of this section is available at the following link:
User Stories:
The user needs to…
Acceptance Criteria:
Insert Here
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 286 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
ID 3.4.11a.1. PAGE TITLE
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Field Header Text: “Search for a Listing”
User clicks “Add New Listing” button on Landing Page to view this page
User Actions
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.11a.2. PROPERTY TYPE - SINGLE SELECT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “Property Type”
Options:
Commercial (MRIS Assist not available)
Lot-Land (MRIS Assist not available)
Multi-Family
Residential
Auto-fill if User Preferences are set
If User Preferences are not set or changed enable “Update Preferences” button
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set Property Type – Property Type
ID 3.4.11a.3. STATE - SINGLE SELECT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “State”
Options:
Only display states currently MRIS offers
Auto-fill if User Preferences are set
If User Preferences are not set or changed enable “Update Preferences” button
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Enable County field
Update County field based on selection
Set Property Type - State
ID 3.4.11a.4. COUNTY - SINGLE SELECT BOX
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 287 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “County”
Display only counties available based on State selected
Auto-fill if User Preferences are set
If User Preferences are not set or changed enable “Update Preferences” button
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Set Property Type County
ID 3.4.11a.5. UPDATE PREFERENCES - BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = No
Button Text: “Update Preferences”
Enabled Only if preferences are not set or changed
Location: Browser right of “County” field
User Actions
Click to update or set preferences
System Response
Set/Update preferences with changes from the following fields:
Property Type
State
County
ID 3.4.11a.6. ADDRESS - FREE FORM TEXT BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Address (Full or Partial”
Includes:
Unit Number
Street Direction
Street
Street Type
City
State
Zip
User Actions
Type full or partial address
System Response
User should be able to type complete address (full or partial)
System should to parse out ‘Street Type” (St, Drive, Way, Ave)
User may see/research past searches by clicking Down arrow
Set search criteria
ID 3.4.11a.7. TAX ID - MIXED TEXT/NUMBER FIELD
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 288 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Tax ID”
User Actions
Type Tax ID
System Response
Set as primary search criteria
ID 3.4.11a.8. VIEW RESULT - BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Mandatory Field = Yes
Field Header Text: “View Result”
User Actions
Click to execute search with selected search criteria
System Response
Perform search based on selected search criteria
Save search criteria
Display search results
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 289 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
3.4.11b New Features – MRISAssist: Step 2, Search Results
Figure 39 - MRISAssist: Search Results
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 290 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
ID 3.4.11b.1. MRISASSIST ™ SEARCH RESULTS - DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
Field Header Text: “Search Results”
User Actions
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.11b.2. EXPLANATORY TEXT - DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Line 1: “This page offers you a choice to”
Line 2: “compare 4 properties, using MRISAssist,”
Line 3: “copy a listing or,”
Line 4: “start a new listing.”
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.11b.3. SEARCH CRITERIA - DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Field Header Text Line 1: “Search Criteria”
Field Header Text Line 2: Street Address, city, state or taxID entered on Step 1
Field Header Text Line 3: “Displaying “ (display count) “out of” (total similar match count)
User Actions
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.11b.4. NEW SEARCH - NAV LINK
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Field Header Text: “New Search”
Returns to “Search” page, Step 1
User Actions
Click to return to Search to start search over
System Response
Display Search page with search criteria reset except for user preferences
ID 3.4.11b.5. ADVANCED SEARCH - NAV LINK
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 291 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Description/Notes
1. Field Header Text: “Advanced Search”
2. Location: Browser right of New Search
3. Returns to Search with + Advanced Search Options Nav/Link expanded with original search criteria auto-filled
4. For example: 11200 Lake Breeze Dr was original address entered on Search for a Listing. When the user returns to the Search
for a Listing page with the Advanced Search Options, 11200 Lake Breeze Dr is still in the Address field, and Beds and Baths and as
many fields as possible are auto-filled with the most current information from the tax records and current listing.
User Actions
Click to narrow search criteria
System Response
Opens Matrix Residential search page in i-frame
Matrix Residential search page maintains previous search settings
ID 3.4.11b.6. YOUR NEXT OPTIONS - SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Field Header Text: “Your Next Options”
Options:
Compare 4 Properties Using MRISAssist
Copy One Listing
Start a Blank Listing
User Action
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
If “Your Next Options” = “Compare 4 Properties Using MRISAssist” Dynamic Text - Button Text: (based on selections made)
Choose 4 Selections (0 selections)
Choose 3 Selections (1 selection)
Choose 2 Selections (2 selections)
Choose 1 Selection (3 selections)
Compare Selections (4 selections)
Next Steps - Dynamic Drop down box Options:
Compare (selected)
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
If “Your Next Options” = “Copy One Listing”
Dynamic Text - Button Text: “Go To Next Steps”
Next Steps - Dynamic Drop down box Options:
Copy This Listing
If “Your Next Options” = “Start a Blank Listing”
Dynamic Text - Button = “Go To Next Steps”
Next Steps - Dynamic Drop down box Options:
Begin Blank Listing
ID 3.4.11b.7. SORT BY – SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 292 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Resorts listings by selected option
Options:
Address: A-Z
Address: Z-A
Architectural Style: A-Z
Architectural Style: Z-A
Baths: 0-9
Baths: 9-0
Beds: 0-9
Beds: 9-0
Tax ID: 0-9
Sq Footage: 0-9
Sq Footage: 9-0
Year Built: 0-9
Year Built 9-0
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
Resort displayed listings in selected option order
ID 3.4.11b.8. DYNAMIC TEXT - BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Button Text Options:
Go To Next Step
Choose 4 Selections
Choose 3 Selections
Choose 2 Selections
Choose 1 Selection
Compare Selections
User Action
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
If Dynamic Text - Button = any of the following Options, then go to MRISAssist
Choose 4 Selections
Choose 3 Selections
Choose 2 Selections
Choose 1 Selection
Compare Selections
If Dynamic Text - Button = Copy Listing,
Button Text = “Go To Next Step”
Create new listing with selected property.
If Dynamic Text - Button = Begin Blank
Button Text: “Go To Next Step”
Create new listing with no information
ID 3.4.11b.9. EXACT MATCH - DISPLAY TEXT
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 293 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Field Header Text: “Exact Match” (Count)
Display if search criteria matches exactly
If no exact match, then display Similar Matches
User Actions
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.11b.10. THUMBNAIL - IMAGE
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
First column
Hover to magnify
Approximate maximum Width: ?
Approximate maximum height: ?
User Actions
Hover to view larger photo
System Response
Magnify photo
ID 3.4.11b.11. ADDRESS - DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Second column
Spans two columns
Field Header Text: Exact match address
User Actions
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.11b.12. TAX ID - DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Field Header Text: “Tax ID:”
Display exact match tax ID
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.11b.13. ARCHITECTURAL TYPE - DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 294 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
1.
2.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Field Header Text: “Architectural Type:”
Display exact match architectural type
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.11b.14. SUBDIVISION - DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Field Header Text: “Subdivision:”
Display exact match subdivision
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.11b.15. FINISHED SQ FT - DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Field Header Text: “Finished Sq Ft:”
Display exact match finished square footage
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.11b.16. BEDS - DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Third column
Field Header Text: “Beds:”
Display exact match Total Bedrooms count
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.11b.17. BATHS - DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Field Header Text: “Baths:”
Display exact match Total Bathroom count
User Action
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 295 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.11b.18. YEAR BUILT - DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Field Header Text: “Yr Built:”
Display exact match Year Built
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.11b.19. CURRENT STATUS - DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Fourth Column
Field Header Text: “Current Status:”
Display exact match current status
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.11b.20. LIST DATE - DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Field Header Text: “List Date:”
Display exact match list date
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.11b.21. PROGRESS BAR - IMAGE/ACTIVE DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Display Progress Bar based on R3 DRD, Appendix B, “Progress Algorithm Explained”
Display percentage complete in text
User Action
None
System Response
None
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 296 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
ID 3.4.11b.22. PREVIOUS STATUS - DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Field Header Text Line 1: “Previous Listings:”
Field Header Text Line 2: Exact match most previous status
Field Header Text Line 3: Exact match most previous list date
Field Header Text Line 4: Exact match most previous progress bar (same functionality as Progress Bar as above)
Field Header Text Line 5: Exact match 2nd most previous status
Field Header Text Line 6: Exact match 2nd most previous list date
Field Header Text Line 7: Exact match 2nd most previous progress bar
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.11b.23. NEXT STEPS - DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Location: Browser right of each listing status
Options:
Compare
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
Copy This Listing
Begin Blank Listing
User Action
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
If Next Steps = Use MRISAssist, then perform search using the selected property as search criteria for the following fields:
Total Bedrooms
Total Bathrooms
Square Footage
Architectural Style
Neighborhood/Advertised Subdivision
Year Built
Display results
If Next Steps = Copy Listing, then create new listing with selected property.
If selected property has more than one status displayed, display message box: “Which listing would you like to copy?” with the following
components
3 most current statuses
3 most current list dates
3 and progress bars for each listing
Copy button for each listing
Cancel button
Create new with information from selected listing
If Next Steps = Begin Blank, create new listing with no information
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 297 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
ID 3.4.11b.24. SIMILAR MATCHES - DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Field Header Text Line 1: “Similar Matches (Displaying “ (display count) “out of” (total similar match count) “)”
Field Header Text Line 2: “Matches” (search criteria match count) “out of” (search criteria count)
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.11b.25. SIMILAR MATCH PROPERTY - DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
2.
Same Fields and functionality as Exact Match except the following:
Display current status, list date and progress bar
User Action
None
System Response
None
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 298 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
3.4.11c New Features – MRISAssist: Step 3, Compare Properties
Figure 40 - MRISAssist - Compare Properties
ID 3.4.11c.1.
MRISASSIST ™ COMPARE PROPERTIES - DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Field Header Text: “MRISAssist ™ - Compare Properties”
Line 2: “The property below has been auto-filled”
Line 3: “Please confirm the accuracy of each field”
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.11c.2.
COMPLIANCE - DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 299 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Line 1: “For your convenience, MRIS has auto-filled likely fields”
Line 2: “below based on your search criteria”
Line 3: “it is your responsibility to validate”
Line 4: “(via on-site survey of other methods)”
Line 5: “the accuracy of data you update or accept”
Location: Browser right of MRISAssist - Title centered in Browser window
ID 3.4.11c.3.
TAB/SECTION NAME - NAV/LINK
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1st Column
Field Header Text Options: (defaults shown)
-Listing Details
Promotion Details - Unavailable
+ Financial Details
+ Building Details
+ Lot/Land Details
+ Community Details
User Action
Click to expand to view imported fields
System Response
Options shown as default settings
Each tab expands to display fields in order as shown in new Add Listing section - see each Tab section for details
ID 3.4.11c.4.
FIELD HEADER - DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1. 1st Column
2. Field Header Text: Various
3. Imported field headers (see master taxonomy list.xls for approved fields to import) in order as shown in new Add Listing
section
User Actions
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.11c.5.
ADDRESS LISTING - MOUSEOVER PHOTO
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th Column
Field Header Text: 1st Listing
On MouseOver show photo
User Actions
Place cursor over address to view photo of listing
System Response
Display photo of listing
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 300 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
ID 3.4.11c.6.
R4 – Add/Update Section
SHOW/HIDE THIS PROPERTY – TOGGLE DISPLAY NAV/LINK
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
3rd, 4th, 5th Column only
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Hide This Property” (default)
Toggle Show/Hide Input Fields for selected property
User Action
Click nav/link to show/hide input fields of selected property
System Response
Show/Hide Input Fields of Selected Property
For Example:
ID 3.4.11c.7.
INPUT FIELDS - VARIOUS INPUT
Description/Notes
1. 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, Column
2. Imported fields (see master taxonomy list.xls for approved fields to import) by tabs in order as shown in new Add Listing
section
3. 2nd column field is editable
4. 3rd, 4th, and 5th column are not editable
5. Differing imported field information from other listings is displayed in red.
6. For example: Cooling System/Fuel fields are imported. All fields are the same with “Electric” and are displayed in black. 3
properties agree with “Central A/C” the 1st property differs and displays “Heat Pump” in red.
User Actions
Update/Confirm imported field information. If a field is red, (due to an inconsistency between the 4 properties) you may want to make a
change
System Response
Various depending on type of imported field
ID 3.4.11c.8.
ACCEPT - BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
2nd column only
Button Text: “Accept”
Accept imported field as is or with changes
Location: Below each imported field
User Action
Click to accept/confirm imported/changed field information
System Response
Set imported/changed field information in new listing
ID 3.4.11c.9.
PREVIOUS - BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2nd Column only
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 301 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
2.
3.
R4 – Add/Update Section
Button Text: “Previous”
Location: Below last imported field of each Tab/Section
User Actions
Click to view previous tab
System Response
Saves imported fields as is or with new changes
Closes current expanded tab/section
Expands previous tab in order
ID 3.4.11c.10.
SAVE AND CONTINUE - BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
2nd column only
Button Text: “Save and Continue”
Location: Below last imported field, Browser right of Previous button
User Actions
Click to save new information and continue Accepting imported information
System Response
Saves imported fields as is or with new changes
Closes current expanded tab
Expands new tab in order
ID 3.4.11c.11.
SAVE AND RETURN – BUTTON
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Button Text: “Save and Return”
Location: Browser right of Save and Continue button
User Action
Click to save new information, leave Keystone and return later to Accept imported information
System Response
Save new Accepted fields
Set bookmark
Display bookmarked page with last saved tab/section expanded when user returns
ID 3.4.11c.12.
NEXT STEPS - SINGLE SELECT DROP DOWN BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Options:
Next Steps
Create Profile Form
Continue Editing This Listing
Perform Both
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 302 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
User Actions
Click to expand drop down box
System Response
Expand drop down box
If Next Steps = Create Profile Form then:
Save new information
Display Profile Sheet
If Next Steps = Continue Editing This Listing then:
Save new information
Display Add Listing Section
If Next Steps = Perform Both then:
Save new information to listing
Save new information as Profile Sheet PDF
Display Add Listing Section
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 303 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
3/11/16 10:46 PM
R4 – Add/Update Section
Page 304 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
3.4.11d. New Features – Quick Start Profile Sheet
Figure 41 - Profile Sheet
Vision Statement:
For full layout of Profile Sheet, see Google Docs, “profile sheet” presentation.
User Story:
Acceptance Criteria
ID 3.4.11d.1. CLIENT LOGO – IMAGE
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: N/A
If no image available, then Contact Info moves to the left
Location: Flush left
User Action
None
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 305 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
System Response
None
NEW FIELD
ID 3.4.11d.2. CONTACT INFO – DISPLAY TEXT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text Line 1: “Prepared For:”
Line 2: Owner 1 First Name, Owner 2 First Name, Owner 1& 2 Last Name (where Owner 1& 2 Last Name are same)
Line 3: Full Listing Address
Lines 4: Owner 1 Primary Phone and email
Location: Browser right of Client Logo, if no Client Logo, Flush left
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.11d.3. MRIS COPYRIGHT STATEMENT AND LOGO – DISPLAY TEXT, IMAGE
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: Copyright Statement
Location: Flush Right
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.11d.4. LEGEND – DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
Mandatory Field = No
2.
Field Header Text: “Known fields are already completed, please complete all” + editable field example
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.11d.5. MAIN TAB – EXPAND COLLAPSE NAV/LINK
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Mandatory Field = No
Display all fields in following tab order:
Listing
Financial
Building
Lot/Land
Community
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 306 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
8. Promotions
9. Main Tabs (listed above) are expand/collapsible for easier viewing
Default = all tabs expanded
User Action
Click to collapse/expand a tab section
System Response
Collapse/expand a selected tab section
ID 3.4.11d.6. COMMENT AREA – EDITABLE FIELD
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Comments:”
Display at end of each Main Tab
Expands full width of page
User Action:
Type notes for Main Tab
System Response
None
ID 3.4.11d.7. KNOWN FIELD – DISPLAY TEXT
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: Various, Imported field from MRISAssist
If field content is Accepted and Same from import from MRISAssist display Field in black but not editable
If field content is Accepted and Differs from import from MRISAssist display Field in red but not editable
See “profile sheet” in google docs for suggested layout
User Action
None
System Response
None
ID 3.4.11d.8. UNKNOWN FIELD – EDITABLE FIELD
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: Various, Imported field from MRISAssist
If field content is blank or not accepted from import MRISAssist display editable field
See “profile sheet” in google docs for suggested layout
User Action
Type known field information
System Response
None?
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 307 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
ID 3.4.11d.9. PRINT - DIALOG BOX
Description/Notes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Mandatory Field = No
Field Header Text: “Print”
Options:
All Sections – Completed
All Sections – Blank, Customer Copy
Listing
Financing
Building
Lot/Land
Community
Promotions
User Actions
Check the sections you want printed
System Response
Print the sections selected
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 308 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
3/11/16 10:46 PM
R4 – Add/Update Section
Page 309 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
4. Appendices
Appendix A. Standard Functionality
When loading a new page, the first field should have focus.
Displayed Fields
All fields are displayed, but enabled and disabled based on user selections
Tab Key Index
Every enabled field is tabbable in the following order, left to right top to bottom
Field Header Text
If Mandatory field = No, field header text ends with (Optional), the field header text may change based on user selection, for example:
Type of Sale = Sale or Rental
Type Filtering
User should be able to type to filter options. If user continues to type to find exact match, or closest match in options, option is selected.
For example: Type “art” option in Architectural Style. “Art Deco,” “Arts & Crafts” and “Beaux Arts” display as options. The user may either
click one of the choices, continue to type or delete “art” to clear the filter.
Standard Sort Order
If “None” is an option, it should be displayed first.
In fields with 11 or more option, display 10 most selected by system with “MORE” clickable to view all (see Matrix for example),
alphabetical until system has enough metrics
Active Field
When a field is active, the field header text is white and background display Mandatory color ( ) if Mandatory field = Yes or Optional color
( ), if Mandatory field = No.
For example: The Listing > Essentials page loads, Type of Sale has focus, and is therefore active, and is Mandatory. The field header text,
“Type of Sale,” is white with a Mandatory color background. Once the user tabs or clicks to the next field, Type of Ownership, also
Mandatory, this field will be the same. Once the user tabs or clicks to Comparable Purpose Only, Mandatory = No, the Field header text,
“Comparable Purpose Only” is white, with an Optional background color. There is only one active field at a time.
Multi Select Drop Down Box Functionality
User can select more than one selections, there is no limit to the number of selections; however, if none is chosen, no other option may
be selected. With the addition of “Smart Fields,” not allowing a user to select mutually exculsive choices in a drop down box, Help Tips
should explain to user’s why they can’t make a selection.
For example: In the Parking multi selection drop down box, if a user selects “Faces Front,” the “Smart Field” does not allow them to select
“Faces Rear” or “Faces Side.” The Help Tips should explain this to the user, should they select “Faces Rear” or “Faces Side,” after selecting
“Faces Front.”
Single Select drop down box
User can select one selection
Radio Button
Field Header Text ends with “?”
Standard Options:
Yes
No
No default selected - unless stated
Date with Calendar Field
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 310 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Date text box format: mm/dd/yyyy
Calendar functionality
opens with current year, month, date selected
opens below icon
if a date is already in free form text box, calendar opens to that date (IE: if 4/5/2012 in text box, calendar will display April 2012 with 5th
selected)
Name Field
Two fields side by side with options displayed in fields
Options:
First Name
Last Name
Phone Field
Three Fields side by side by side
First field character format – 3 digits – automatically tab to next field when 3 digits are completed in field
Second field character format – 3 digits – automatically tab to next field when 3 digits are completed in field
Third field character format – 4 digits
Update Preferences Button
Button ebales only if changes to User Preferences have been made
Save changes when clicked to Prefences Section
Field selections display per User Preferences until changes have been made
Year Field drop down box
Options:
Display years 1900 to current year
When drop down box is expanded: Display atleast 12-20 years
For example: If current year is 2012, when user clicks on Year field, user should be able to see years 2012 – 1992 as options from which to
select.
Expand/Collapse Nav/Link
Standard Text Format when collapsed: “+ “ link text
Standard Text Format when expanded: “-” link text
Long text field
includes:
Long text field
Character Counter:
Display Text: (typed characters count/total characters available)
Location: character counter at top of long text box aligned right
Check Spelling Link:
Uses MRIS Compliance/Spelling engine
Opens Spell Checker in new window
Location: check spelling link at bottom of long text box aligned right
Time Field Options
12:00
12:30
1:00
1:30
2:00
2:30
3:00
3:30
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 311 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
4:00
4:30
5:00
5:30
6:00
6:30
7:00
7:30
8:00
8:30
9:00
9:30
10:00
10:30
11:00
11:30
AM/PM Options
AM
PM
Phone Field Character Format
(###) ###-####
Maximum characters = 10
Standard Distance Options
Less than 1 Block
1 Block
2 Blocks
3 Blocks
4 Blocks
1/2 Mile
1 Mile
Less than 2 Miles
More than 2 Miles
Apply to: order
room
similar rooms (kitchens/bath)
level
whole house
Mandatory vs. Optional Fields
Please always refer to the master taxonomy.xls spreadsheet for the lastest updates on field Tags, mandatory settings and field options.
Field Formats
No format changes unless noted
Help Tips
Content to be provided by education department
Default = Show at launch
Displays Browser right of field in Input Area
Content defines active field
Training Department to provide definitions and explanation of conditional fields (date/times and accepting back-ups)
If field is disabled, provide link to enable field For example: If Farm Remarks are disabled, provide link to Building > External Essentials to
allow user to change Dwelling type.
Opening Windows
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 312 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
Windows should be opened in new windows, light boxes whenever possible. New information provided should be updated in the current
working page.
Admin Tool
System should allow Admin Users to edit Field Headers without the need for a release (using internal approval procedures to be
developed at future date
System should allow Admin Users to add new descriptors to existing fields without the need for a release (using internal approval
procedures to be developed at future date)
System should allow Admin Users to add and modify Help text without the need for a release (using internal approval procedures to be
developed at future date.
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 313 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
5. Glossary
Terms are listed by order of hierarchy.
Term
Tab
Page
Input Area
R4 – Add/Update Section
Definition
Located in left side of the browser window, main topics of
information
Specific sub-topics within a Tab
Located in the center on the browser window, main area which
includes a form for input
Walk Score
Any API that offers name and distance for nearby locations
Walk Score was used as an example and is already used by MRIS in
Homesdatabase.com
MapQuest
Any API or website to enable the user address look up or map point.
Tab Key Index
The order of fields to activate when using the tab key
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 314 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
3/11/16 10:46 PM
R4 – Add/Update Section
Page 315 of 316
DRAFT - Design Requirements Document
R4 – Add/Update Section
6. Index
3/11/16 10:46 PM
Page 316 of 316